Loewe Reference 55 Owner Manual

Reference

TV

Reference 85

Reference 75

Reference 55

User manual

Reference 55-85

User manual

Imprint

Imprint

Loewe Technologies GmbH

Industriestraße 11

D-96317 Kronach www.loewe.tv

Editorial date 11/15-1.1 TB

© Loewe Technologies GmbH, Kronach

ID: 2.2.13.0

All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors reserved.

2

Reference 55-85

User manual

Table of contents

Imprint ...........................................................................................2

Welcome ........................................................................................5

Scope of delivery .......................................................................................... 5

About this user manual ............................................................................... 5

Video ............................................................................................ 57

Video playback ............................................................................................58

Additional functions for DR+ archive playback .......................................61

For your safety ..............................................................................6

Remote control button mapping ................................................8

Audio/Radio .............................................................................. 64

Audio playback ...........................................................................................65

Radio mode (DVB radio) ........................................................................... 67

Radio mode (Internet radio) .....................................................................68

Operating controls on the TV set ...............................................9

Photo .......................................................................................... 69

Photo display ...............................................................................................70

Connections rear side of the device ........................................ 10

Reference 55 ............................................................................................... 10

Reference 75 / 85 ........................................................................................ 11

Web .............................................................................................. 71

MediaNet ......................................................................................................71

Browser ........................................................................................................ 73

Preparing the TV set .................................................................. 12

Installing the TV set .....................................................................................12

Cable fixing ...................................................................................................12

Set covers .....................................................................................................12

Connecting the TV set ................................................................................13

Preparing the remote control unit .............................................................14

Switching the TV set ON/OFF ...................................................................15

General information on menu operation ................................. 16

On-screen displays ..................................................................... 19

Explanation of keys ......................................................................................19

Explanation of symbols ..............................................................................19

Automatic menu info ..................................................................................19

Permanent clock display ............................................................................19

Operation without remote control ........................................... 19

Initial installation ...................................................................... 20

Initial installation wizard .............................................................................20

TV set as a monitor .....................................................................................31

Home view ...................................................................................32

Home view - Favourites .............................................................................32

Home view - Sources .................................................................................32

TV .................................................................................................33

Setting the volume .....................................................................................33

Select station ..............................................................................................33

Status display ..............................................................................................35

Function list (TV mode) .............................................................................36

AV list (AV Source) ......................................................................................36

Electronic Programme Guide – EPG........................................................ 37

Teletext .........................................................................................................40

Rotating the TV set ......................................................................................41

HbbTV / MediaText ....................................................................................42

Picture in Picture (PIP) ...............................................................................43

Digital Recorder ..........................................................................................44

TV viewing with time shift .......................................................................44

Archive recording .....................................................................................45

Multi recording .........................................................................................46

DR+ archive .............................................................................................. 47

DR+ Streaming .........................................................................................51

Follow-Me function ...................................................................................51

Multiroom ....................................................................................................52

Timer ............................................................................................................53

System settings .........................................................................74

Picture .......................................................................................................... 75

Sound ........................................................................................................... 78

Cinema Surround .......................................................................................79

Stations ........................................................................................................80

Automatic scan TV+Radio ......................................................................81

Manual Scan TV / Radio .........................................................................82

Station lists TV / Radio ...........................................................................84

Compose / edit Personal list ..................................................................85

Update station list automatically ...........................................................86

Transfer all station lists ............................................................................86

Control ......................................................................................................... 87

Language ..................................................................................................88

EPG ............................................................................................................88

Parental lock .............................................................................................89

Energy efficiency ......................................................................................90

Quick start mode .....................................................................................90

Software update........................................................................................91

On-screen displays ..................................................................................96

Time and date ..........................................................................................96

DVB settings ............................................................................................. 97

PIP .............................................................................................................. 97

DR+ ...........................................................................................................98

Standard Teletext .....................................................................................99

HbbTV .....................................................................................................100

WEB key function...................................................................................100

Rotate TV .................................................................................................101

Hard disks ............................................................................................... 102

Export log file ..........................................................................................103

Multimedia / Network .............................................................................. 104

Network settings .................................................................................... 104

Multimedia settings ............................................................................... 107

Renderer ................................................................................................. 107

Mobile Recording ...................................................................................108

Bluetooth ................................................................................................109

Connections ................................................................................................111

Sound components ...............................................................................112

Antenna DVB ........................................................................................... 117

AV connection settings .......................................................................... 117

Digital Link ................................................................................................118

Gaming mode .........................................................................................118

3

Reference 55-85

User manual

Table of contents

System settings (continued) .................................................. 119

Extras ..........................................................................................................119

DR+ Streaming .......................................................................................119

Integrated features ................................................................................120

Reset to factory settings .......................................................................120

Conditional Access module (CA module) ...........................................121

External devices ....................................................................... 123

Devices to the HDMI connections .......................................................... 123

Digital Link HD ........................................................................................... 124

Devices on AV ............................................................................................ 125

Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ................................... 127

Connecting the speaker system (DAL) ................................................. 127

Connecting active loudspeakers ............................................................ 128

Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................... 128

Audio playback from external devices ................................................... 129

IR-Link ........................................................................................................ 129

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ............................................................. 129

Setting the remote control ......................................................................130

Teaching the remote control ...................................................131

Loewe Apps ............................................................................... 133

Smart tv2move App ................................................................................ 133

Smart Assist App ..................................................................................... 134

Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 135

Technical Data .......................................................................... 137

Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI ................................................................ 138

Signal input groups .................................................................................. 138

Accessories ...............................................................................139

Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................ 139

Mounting options .....................................................................................140

VESA standard ...........................................................................................141

Environment .............................................................................142

Legal information .....................................................................142

Miscellaneous ...........................................................................143

Screen cleaning ........................................................................................ 143

CA module error codes ............................................................................147

Glossary ....................................................................................148

EC Declaration of Conformity..................................................151

Index .......................................................................................... 152

Service .......................................................................................156

Code page ................................................................................. 157

Notes ......................................................................................... 159

4

Reference 55-85

User manual

Welcome

Thank you, for choosing a Loewe product and having placed your trust in us.

About this user manual

For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we recommend you read the chapter For your safety before switching the TV set on for the first time.

With Loewe you have not simply decided on a modern and technically innovative TV set, but for timeless design, sharp picture quality, brilliant sound for movies and music as well as intuitive operation with the

Loewe remote control unit, smart phone or tablet. In short, Loewe is perfect for home entertainment – Made in Germany.

The chapter glossary gives explanations of certain terms used in the

TV set and the user manual.

We look forward to welcome you as our customer and hope that you enjoy your Premium Home Entertainment made by Loewe.

Paragraphs which begin with the symbol indicate important instructions, tips or conditions for the following settings.

Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control or TV set are written in bold type.

Many features, one result: perfect Home Entertainment.

The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the left of the text containing the instructions for action.

Just more entertainment.

The Loewe Assist Media user interface is intuitive and graphically optimised. This is how you quickly find your desired content – from TV set to online.

In the user guide refer to Home view.

Perfectly networked.

Thanks to its numerous connections, your Loewe TV becomes your entertainment centre. Connect it to the

Internet, DVD/Blu-ray player, external speakers, etc.

In the user guide refer to Media+

Hard disk for your TV archive.

Record the TV programme or pause it and continue watching it at a later date. With DR+ (Digital Recording), all this is no problem for your Loewe TV set.

In the user guide refer to Digital Recorder.

Customer

Care

Center

Your contact person.

We are happy to help you with any questions regarding your

TV set and other Loewe products.

In the user guide refer to Service.

Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the

TV set can differ from those described here.

All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos, titles, albums and album covers in this user manual are examples.

In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set.

In the user manual, this symbol indicates places in which the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.

The user guide and the user manual for your TV set are updated at irregular intervals. We recommend an occasional examination on the

Support Portal of the Loewe homepage.

General information on the operation of the

TV set

For further information on the user interface and the general operation of your TV set see chapter General information on the operation .

Interactive data services

In some countries the stations also broadcast interactive data services with their programmes, leading to the functions of individual keys not being available or only so to a limited extent. You can find out more about this in chapter TV , section HbbTV / MediaText .

Scope of delivery

LCD TV set

Mains cable

Antenna cable

Remote control Assist with two batteries

Attache-câble à velcro

User guide

Adhesive cable tie (Reference 55)

Cable supports, 4 pieces (Reference 75 / 85)

Covers of the rear wall openings, 4 pieces (Reference 75 / 85)

Tool kit for mounting the set-up solution

Important information

Loewe does not accept any liability for the nature and content of receivable Internet services. This also applies to the Loewe MediaNet portal. With its devices, Loewe provides the technical platform that fundamentally enables such material to be received. Loewe cannot make any guarantees regarding changes in scope and content, particularly with regard to the future and after going to press. The receivable online services are not included in the delivery and can vary depending on the product and country.

5

Reference 55-85

User manual

For your safety

For your safety, and to avoid unnecessary damage to your unit, please read and follow the safety instructions below:

Intended use and ambient conditions

This TV set is intended exclusively for receiving and playing visual and audio signals. It must not be used in rooms with a high level of humidity

(e.g. bathroom, sauna) or a high dust concentration. The manufacturer‘s warranty is only valid for use in the specified permissible environment.

If the unit is used outdoors, make sure that it is protected from moisture

(rain, dripping water and splashing water or dew). High humidity and dust concentrations lead to leakage currents in the device. This can result in a shock hazard when touching it or even fire.

If you have moved the unit out of the cold into a warm environment, leave it switched off for about an hour to avoid the formation of condensation.

Do not place objects containing liquids on top of the unit. Protect the appliance against dripping and splashing water.

Candles or naked flames must be kept away from the TV set at all times to prevent it from catching fire.

Never place the TV set in a location where it is exposed to vibrations. This may lead to damage.

Air circulation and high temperatures

The vent slots on the rear panel of the set must always be kept unobstructed. Please do not place newspapers or cloths on/over the

TV set.

Make sure that there is at least 10 cm free space on the sides and above the set for air circulation, if the set is placed in a cabinet or on a shelf.

10 cm

Like any electronic device, your TV set requires air for cooling. Obstruction of the air circulation can cause fires.

10 cm

10 cm

Prevent metal items, needles, paper clips, liquids, wax, or similar items, from getting into the interior of the device through the vent slots in the rear panel. Such objects can cause short circuits in the set, which could possibly cause a fire.

If something should get into the interior of the set then immediately unplug the mains plug of the device and contact the field service for more information.

Transporting

Move the device in vertical position only. Get hold of the device on the upper and lower edges of the housing.

Do not stand it up on the bottom edge, so as to reduce the risk of damage and soiling. If the set has to be put down during packing/ unpacking, place the TV set with its entire front surface lying flat on soft material. Use a blanket or the fleece from the packing material as an underlay.

The LCD screen is made of glass or plastic and can break if not handled properly.

Always wear rubber gloves to carry the TV set if the LCD screen is damaged and liquid crystal might be leaking out. In the case of skin contact immediately rinse thoroughly with water.

Power supply

Incorrect voltages can damage the unit. This device may only be connected to a power supply with the voltage and frequency indicated on the type plate using the supplied mains cable. The mains plug of the

TV set must be easily accessible so that the device can be disconnected from the mains at any time. When unplugging the unit from the mains, pull at the connector body and not at the cable. The cables in the mains plug could otherwise be damaged and could cause a short-circuit when plugged in again.

Lay the mains cable so that it cannot be damaged. Do not step on the mains cable. The mains cable may not be kinked or laid over sharp edges nor be exposed to chemicals; the latter also applies to the unit as a whole. A mains cable with damaged insulation can cause electric shocks and poses a fire risk.

About the LCD screen

The TV set with LCD screen you have purchased satisfies the most rigorous quality requirements and has been inspected with respect to pixel errors. Despite of thorough care when manufacturing the display, it cannot be 100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will occur due to technical reasons. Please understand that these types of effects, as long as they are within the limits specified in the standard, cannot be considered as a device defect in terms of the guarantee.

Avoid displaying still images for long periods of time. It is possible that a copy of the image may remain visible.

TV sets with 3D function

Read the following safety instructions before using the 3D function of your TV set.

Please use the Loewe 3D TV sets only with the Loewe 3D glasses which can be purchased as an accessory from your Loewe dealer.

People with a visual disorder may not be able to perceive 3D effects or may only be able to perceive them to a limited extent. People who are sensitive to flickering images (e.g. those with epilepsy) should only use the 3D function after having consulted their doctor.

It might take some time for you to get used to the 3D glasses and before you can perceive the 3D effects properly.

Stop using the 3D function immediately if you experience any feelings of nausea, dizziness or malaise when viewing 3D content.

Supervise children whilst they are viewing 3D content, as they can be particularly sensitive to it.

Allow more time for a break after having watched 3D movies, so that you are able to relax. Failure to do so could result in headaches, fatigue, dizziness or malaise.

Position yourself comfortably in front of the 3D TV set and ensure that you are seated firmly. By doing this, you will avoid any injuries that may occur due to reacting to extreme 3D content.

Switch off any artificial light sources (e.g., energy saving lamp) between the TV set and the 3D glasses. These could impair the infrared reception or the TV picture may flicker as a result.

6

Reference 55-85

User manual

For your safety

Set-up

Loewe flatscreen TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. The TV set is suitable for mounting in many different ways. Note the assembly instructions regarding the different possible mounting options.

When using accessories from other manufacturers take care that the

TV set can be easily inclined or rotated on the respective mounting option.

For mounting options from other manufacturers with motor drive, make sure that the TV set cannot be rotated manually. The use of mounting options from other manufacturers with locks in certain positions is generally discouraged.

When rotating the TV set it is essential to ensure that the pressure exerted on the device frame is not too large. Especially in case of large-format displays there is a risk to damage the screen.

Before setting up the device, please check that the final location is suitable to bear the load of the device in terms of surface (sensitivity to pressure) and stability (statics).

This is particularly the case for the high-gloss painted surfaces and surfaces that are made from real wood / real wood veneer or plastic surfaces.

Place the TV set with the table or floor stand only on a level, sturdy, horizontal base. Particularly ensure that the set does not protrude to the front when placed in or on pieces of furniture.

Place the TV set in a normal position for use. TV set may only be used in an upright horizontal position. It may not be tilted by more than 10 degrees. The TV set must never be operated in portrait position, lying flat or hanging overhead from the ceiling.

D

±10°

Automatic shutdown

If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.

The automatic shutdown is active in the energy efficiency mode

Home Mode .

Automatic shutdown does not occur when using the radio without screen display (screen off).

Cleaning and care

Switch off the TV set with the main switch prior to cleaning.

Clean the TV set, the front screen and the remote control unit with a soft, moist, clean and colour-neutral cloth only, without any aggressive or scouring cleaning agents.

In the case of dirt on the inside, the front screen can be removed (see chapter Miscellaneous , section Screen cleaning ).

The speaker panel of your TV set is covered with textile. Vacuum the surface regularly using a soft brush set.

In case of dirt or stains:

Moisten a soft, colour-neutral cloth with detergent or normal stain remover and gently rub away the stain. You can also treat the mark/ stain directly with normal dry stain remover spray (vacuum up powder).

Do not moisten the covering fabric directly with detergent or stain remover (risk of encrustation). Do not use any solvents to clean the fabric.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when using stain removers.

There is an increased risk of encrustation when cleaning speaker panels with nicotine deposits.

Set up the device where it is not exposed to direct insolation and where it is not exposed to additional heating by radiators.

When using the VESA mounting points (1 , please refer to the information in chapter Accessories , section VESA standard .

Repairs and accessories

Never remove the back of the TV set yourself. Have your TV set repaired or serviced by authorised television technicians only.

Only use original accessories such as Loewe stands, if possible.

Supervision

Do not let children operate the TV set unsupervised and do not let them loiter and play close to the set. The set could tip over, be pushed off or pulled down from the stand surface and injure someone.

Do not allow the switched-on TV set to run unattended.

Volume

Loud music can lead to ear damage. Avoid extreme volume especially over long periods and when using headphones.

Thunder storms

Pull out the mains plug and all connected antenna cables from the TV set in a thunderstorm. Overvoltage caused by lightning strokes can damage the set via the antenna system, as well as via the mains. The mains plug and all connected antenna cables should also be pulled out during long periods of absence.

1) Only available for device type Reference 55.

7

Reference 55-85

User manual

Remote control

Remote control button mapping

Depending on the selected operating mode (TV/Video/Audio/Photo/Web) and function (e.g. DR+, EPG, PIP, Teletext, HbbTV, etc.), the key assignment may differ from the assignment described here (see the corresponding chapter in this user manual).

1

2

3

4

5

6

33

32

31

30

29

1 Sound mute/on.

2 LED display for currently operated device.

3

Call the TV mode.

4

Reassign remote control to SetTop-Box (1 (presetting: Apple TV).

5 Pressing briefly: Open the DR+ archive.

Pressing longer: Call timer list.

6 Add current object to Home favourites.

7 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) on/off.

8 Teletext/MediaText (3 on/off.

9 Pressing briefly: Call function list for the active operating mode.

Pressing longer: Call System settings.

10 V+/V- increase/reduce volume.

11 Pressing briefly: Call station list.

11

12

13

14

15

16

7

8

9

10

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

In the menu: confirm/call up.

12 Green coloured key: screen on/off in Audio/Radio mode.

13 Red coloured key: call preferred value-added network service, if available (3 .

14 Pressing briefly: skip backwards.

Pressing longer: winding backwards.

15 Pressing briefly: direct recording (with determination of recording duration).

Pressing longer: One Touch Recording.

16 Pause / Start/pause the timeshift television.

17 Stop / End timeshift (return to live image).

18 Pressing briefly: skip forwards.

Pressing longer: winding forwards.

19 Play / Start/continue timeshift television.

20 Blue coloured key: call station function list

(selection of language/sound, subtitles or channel/video track).

21 Pressing briefly: Yellow coloured button: Call history.

Pressing longer: Yellow coloured button: Call last station.

22 Navigation on the user interface, select objects.

In the menu / lists: select/set.

23 P+/P– next/previous station.

24 Pressing briefly: step / level back.

Pressing long: close all displays.

25 Press briefly during an on-screen display: info display. Info text appropriate to the content that can assist you further, should you have any questions about your TV set.

Press briefly, without on-screen display: access status display. With status display open and repeatedly pressing the key call the detailed information on the broadcast.

Press longer: show Explanation of keys.

26 PIP (picture in picture) on/off.

27 Call up the Home view.

28 Call up the AV list.

29 Select stations with numeric buttons directly.

In the menu: enter numbers or letters.

30 Call MediaNet (standard assignment) (2 .

31 Reassign remote control to video device (1 (presetting: BluTech Vision 3D).

32 Call radio mode (standard assignment) (1 .

33 Switches the TV set on (mains switch must be turned on) or switches to standby mode.

Press longer while TV set is switched on: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices connected to the HDMI ports will be switched off to standby (System Standby).

(1 The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter External devices , section Setting the remote control ).

(2 The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings , section Control – Web key function ).

(3 Depending on the HbbTV settings (see chapter System settings , section Control – HbbTV ).

8

Reference 55-85

User manual

Operating controls on the TV set

Functions of the operating elements

5

9 -

3

R

7

6

M

4

+

2

8

1

1 Mains switch:

The mains switch is located on the bottom of the set.

Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off with the main switch.

2 On/Off key:

Switching on in standby mode.

Switching off to the standby mode.

3 IR receiver:

Infrared receiver for receiving the remote control commands.

4 Display: white: TV set in standby.

Depending on the ambient brightness, the white LED display is dimmed (1 and lights up with a different degree of brightness.

If the TV set is in quick start mode, the white LED display is not dimmable and starts with full brightness.

white, intermittent: TV set starts.

green: TV set switched on.

red: timer recording active.

blue: TV set in standby and background operation active (EPG data updating, software update or DR+ streaming server function).

5 Infrared transmitter:

When showing 3D content, the 3D glasses Loewe Active

Glasses 3D are controlled via the infrared sensor.

6 Key M:

TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in TV mode.

TV set switched on: call direct control on TV set.

In direct control on TV set: up .

7 Key R:

TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in radio mode.

TV set switched on: toggle TV mode and radio mode.

Direct control on TV set: down .

8 Key +:


Direct control on TV set: to the right .

9 Key – :


Direct control on TV set: to the left .

(1 Automatic dimming depending on the room brightness (OPC) must be activated (see chapter System settings , section Picture ).

9

Reference 55-85

User manual

Connections rear side of the device

Reference 55

Position and function of the connections (Reference 55)

MOTOR

UNIT

K

1 2 3 4 5

1 Slot for Kensington lock

2 AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

3 LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

4 HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1 (with A udio R eturn C hannel)

HDMI type A 1.4b – Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN/OUT

5 HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI type A 1.4b – Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN

6 ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue / DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C/C2

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

7 ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA


F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

9 SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

10 USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

11 MOTOR UNIT - rotating stand control

12 DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

6 7 8 9 10

13 HEADPHONE Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm


HDMI type A 1.4b– Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN

15 AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (Jack 3,5 mm)

16 RS-232C - Serial interface (1 – (RJ12)

17 AV - Micro AV socket (1

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter: Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter: PC/STB video signal

L/R

18 COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)


20 HDMI 4 UHD - HDMI input 4 (2

HDMI type A 2.0 – Digital Video IN (4K@60Hz)/Audio IN

21 USB - USB connection




12

11

(1 The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

(2 HDMI sources that provide UHD content should be connected to this port.

10

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

22

21

20

Reference 55-85

User manual

Connections rear side of the device

Reference 75 / 85

Position and function of the connections (Reference 75 / 85)

1 2 3 4 5

1 AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

2 LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

3 HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1 (with A udio R eturn C hannel)

HDMI type A 1.4b – Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN/OUT


HDMI type A 1.4b – Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN

5 ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue / DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C/C2

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA


F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA


F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

8 SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

9 USB 3.0 - USB connection


10 MOTOR UNIT - rotating stand control

11 DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

12 HEADPHONE Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

6 7 8 9


HDMI type A 1.4b– Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN

14 AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (Jack 3,5 mm)

15 RS-232C - Serial interface (1 – (RJ12)

16 AV - Micro AV socket (1

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter: Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter: PC/STB video signal

L/R



19 HDMI 4 UHD - HDMI input 4 (2

HDMI type A 2.0 – Digital Video IN (4K@60Hz)/Audio IN




USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA

11

10

(1 The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

(2 HDMI sources that provide UHD content should be connected to this port.

11

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

21

20

19

Reference 55-85

User manual

Preparing the TV set

Installing the TV set

Mounting options / Installation notes

Your Loewe dealer can also assist you in finding other mounting options. Look for the corresponding directions in the installation instruction.

The four round self-adhesive covers that are supplied with the TV set, are used as a cover of the four rear panel openings when installing the

TV with Floor Stand Reference 75 / 85 MU.

Choose a place for installing your TV set where no bright light or sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections which impair the picture.

3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value for the viewing distance (e.g., for a 55-inch set approx. 4.2 m for SD signal).

The viewing distance can be reduced with an HD/UHD signal.

Set covers

Reference 55:

In order to remove the rear side cable covers pull them simply from the device.

To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until it snaps in.

The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this, open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.

Cable fixing

Reference 55:

Using the Velcro cable tie supplied, you can fix the rear cables.

When using the table or floor stand, they are to be fixed at the mounting option (see corresponding installation instructions).

When using the wall mount, you can feed the Velcro cable tie through the two openings of the rear panel.

The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the connection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches back into place.

A cable bushing connects the lateral and posterior terminal region. In this way you can pass the cables of the lateral connections through and lay them out together with the rear connecting cables.

with table or floor stand with wall mount

Reference 75 / 85:

With the self-adhesive cable supports supplied, you can fix the connecting cables.

You can determine the position of each cable support according to your needs. The figure contains an exemplified positioning.


To remove the two parts of the cable cover, use for each half the two grip recesses at the bottom of the device. Pull the covers carefully away from the TV set.

The side cover can be swung open.

A cable bushing connects the lateral and posterior terminal region. In this way you can feed the cables of the lateral connections through and lay them out together with the rear connecting cables.

To fit the cover, place the upper edge of the cable cover at the

TV set and press the guides into the profiles of the rear panel until the cover snaps into place on the TV.

If necessary, move the cover up until it is flush with the stop.

12

Reference 55-85

User manual


Connecting the TV set

Connecting to the mains supply

Reference 55:

Remove the cover for the connections.

Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:

First plug the smaller plug (small connector) of the power cord into the AC inlet (AC IN) on the TV set, and then the larger connector (Euro plug) into a mains socket.


Remove the two covers from the connections.

Connect the TV set to a 220-240 V mains socket:

First plug the inlet connector for non-heating apparatus of the power cord into the AC inlet (AC IN) on the TV set, and then the larger connector (Euro plug) into a mains socket.

Connecting antennas

Cable (analogue) / DVB-C / DVB-T antenna:

Plug the cable of antenna, cable TV system or room antenna into the

ANT TV socket.

If you want to use analogue cables / DVB-C connection and a DVB-T antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from your dealer).

Satellite antenna DVB-S:

Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT and

ANT-SAT2 sockets of the TV set respectively.

When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna, connect the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.

When connecting the TV set to a DiSEqC single cable community antenna (in accordance with EN 50494), connect the ANT-SAT socket directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.

In case of a DiSEqC one cable communal system you require only one antenna cable. Further distribution of the signal to the two reception routes is accomplished by the TV set’s satellite tuner.

It is possible, however, to continue using an existing SAT cabling with two antenna cables in a DiSEqC one cable communal system.

If two transmission channels of the DiSEqC single cable community exist, one system channel is used per satellite antenna cable.

Ask your dealer in this regard.

Cable analogue /

DVB-C

R TV

DVB-T DVB-S

13

Reference 55-85

User manual


Connecting the TV set to the Home network

You may link your TV set to the home network by a wired connection

(Ethernet, Powerline adapters separately available) or by a wireless radio connection (WLAN). For wireless connections, the TV set has an internal WLAN antenna.

In order to play back data from your home network your Loewe TV supports the UPnP AV standard.

For the network adaptor configuration, see chapter System settings , section Multimedia / Network – Network settings .

Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the same time connected by a wireless connection to the same network, e.g. router. This may cause severe operational faults!

Preparing the remote control unit

Inserting or replacing batteries

Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.

Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries together.

The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunlight, fire or similar!

Pay attention to the correct polarity of + and – when inserting the batteries.

Example for a wired connection

Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).

TV set LAN switch/router PC

AAA

LR03 LR03

AAA

If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you to change the batteries. Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally friendly way (see chapter Environment / Legal information ).

Push the cover back on from below after having inserted the batteries.

DSL

Example for a wireless connection

You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.

Shadow effects of various materials, such as reinforced concrete, metal surfaces, etc., attenuate the WIFI signal sometimes significantly or completely.

Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set

Press the TV key .

See in chapter External devices ,section Setting the remote control how to operate other Loewe appliances and how to re-programme the remote control keys.

TV set WLAN router PC

DSL

Help for configuration problems

Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or network components owing to the diverse configuration options with home networks.

Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network connections, storage media, media server software and network devices such as routers.

14

Reference 55-85

User manual

Switching the TV set ON/OFF

Switching the TV set ON/OFF

Switching TV set to the standby mode

Switch the mains switch on the bottom side of the device to position I .

The indicator in the control panel on the front side lights up white. The set is now in standby mode.

Switching the TV set on by means of the remote control

Press the on/off key .

Or:

Press the TV key .

The previously watched station will be called.

M

Or:

Press numerical keys 1-9 .

The corresponding station will be called.

After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start mode, see chapter System settings , section Control – Quick start mode ). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status indicator in the control panel lights up in green.

-

R

Control unit

+

Mains switch

Switching the set off with the remote control (Standby)

Press the on/off key.

Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.

Switching the TV on/off on the control unit

To switch the TV set into Operating mode or switch it off to Standby mode, press the middle of the On/Off button for about 2 seconds.

By pressing one of the buttons on the control panel, the TV set can also be turned on. Using the keys M / + / you switch the TV set to TV mode and to radio mode when using the R key.

Switching off the TV set and connected additional devices

(System standby)

Press on/off key long:

Switch TV set and all CEC-capable devices connected to the HDMI interfaces OFF to Standby mode (System

Standby).

Display

Meaning of the colour of the LEDs in the On/Off button: white: TV set in standby.

Depending on the ambient brightness, the white LED display is dimmed (1 and lights up with a different degree of brightness.

If the TV set is in quick start mode, the white LED display is not dimmable and starts with full brightness.

white, intermittent: TV set starts.

green: TV set switched on.

red: timer recording active.

blue: TV set in standby and background operation active (EPG data updating, software update or DR+ streaming server function).

After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start mode, see chapter System settings , section Control – Quick start mode ). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status indicator in the control panel lights up in green.

Quick start mode

If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start

Mode. Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy consumption.

You can find the Quick Start Mode under System settings

ט

Control

ט

Quick start mode .

Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: off .

Technical information

Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or an inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g. power failure) can cause damage to the hard disk file system and hence loss of the recorded broadcasts.

Never ever disconnect the USB storage device from the TV set during a copy process. Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.

However, if unexpected problems occur when operating the hard disk, formatting the hard disk may rectify this. Refer to the instructions in chapter System settings , section Control – Hard disks . This applies also to the use of external USB hard disks with the TV set.

Loewe are not liable for the loss of data on the integrated hard disk of your TV set. To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to an external storage medium.

(1 Automatic dimming depending on the room brightness (OPC) must be activated (see chapter System settings , section Picture ).

15

Reference 55-85

User manual

General information on menu operation


The most important keys for navigation will be explained in general.

The numbers in the text refer to the figure showing the remote control in chapter Remote control .

The arrow keys 22 help you to navigate in the menus and lists of the

TV set and for selecting menu items. They are arranged in the middle of the remote control in a circle around the OK key 11 . Later in this user manual they will be represented as follows:

Structure of the Menu screen

Basically, the structure of the different menu screens is similar, depending on the fact if a wizard, rendering media content or a setup menu are concerned. The structure is explained by means of three different illustrations.

Screen structure: Wizard

Select the desired item.

The OK key 11 is used to confirm a selection, for calling the highlighted menu item and for opening the station list. In this user manual, an instruction for this key looks like the following:

OK confirm.

INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language

Which menu language do you want to use for operation?

A

Deutsch (de) Ελληνικά

English Polski

Français

B

(fi) Русский (ru)

Español (es) č

Nederlands (nl) Sloven č ina (sk) ₼㠖 (zh)

Č eština (cs) Türkçe (tr)

Back with Proceed with C

Using the numerical keys of your remote control 29 you enter programme channels and teletext pages directly. With key 0 you open the AV list. In this user guide, entering numbers with numerical keys is shown as follows:

Entering programme channel directly.

(A) Title bar with name of the wizard and the current operating step.

(B) Selected items, whose number can be different according to the operating step.

(C) Bottom line showing the available operating controls. If required, instructions and information are inserted.

The numerical keys are also used to enter text (see chapter General information on menu operation ,section Entry of characters by remote control ).

Screen structure: Rendering of media content (example:

Audio player)

The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s operating modes. You reach Home view with the HOME key 27 .

Snow Patrol / Eyes Open A B Back

HOME: Call Home view.

C

Pressing the BACK key 24 briefly brings you one level up in the wizard.

Pressing the BACK key longer closes all opened fade-ins. An example for the BACK key in this user manual:

Hands Open Chasing Cars Shut Your Eyes

BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.

00:00 02:56 04:27

D

Pressing longer on the INFO key 25 displays an explanation of the most important key functions of the current operating mode (e.g. TV mode, teletext, PIP, etc.).

E

If the function for a key is not available, this will be indicated by an inserted symbol on the right above.

(A) Title bar with selected album / subdirectory.

(B) Menu item Back to exit the menu or to go back to the previous menu item.

(C) Selection of album or title

(D) Time bar

(E) Bottom line with the different symbols for controlling the playback function.

16

Reference 55-85

User manual


Screen structure: Setup (example: picture)

A B

Picture

Picture ad-

C

Contrast

D

If your desired display format has not been automatically

selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.

You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versa.

Brightness

Colour intensity

Image+

Active

Picture format more ...

Navigation: Wizards

DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)

Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.

Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and additional card.

Scrambled stations no yes

Search method

Symbol rate

Accept Logical Channel Number

Network search

22000 no yes

Frequency search

(A) Selected function in the Home overview (here: system settings)

(B) Home Menu System settings , with selected menu item Picture .

(C) Menu items Picture focusing on Contrast .

(D) Help text for the selected menu item Picture > Contrast .

Navigation: Selection of elements (example: On-screen displays)

Highlighting and thus selecting the symbols/elements or menu items on the screen can be effected by the arrow keys on the remote control.

So you can see all the time where you are. As soon as there is a bar above a symbol or text, this is a selected element.

Back

On-screen displays

On-screen displays

Display time

Volume display

B Automatic menu info off

Key explanation

off

Automatic HDMI hint off

Right info display

Switch off curtain

C A

If the menu item(s) (marked white) is/are already correctly preset:

Go to next step.

Otherwise:

Mark the menu item that you want to change.

The update will be adopted automatically.

The fount colour of the previously active item will change to grey. If not,

OK confirm the selection.

Go to next step.

Navigation: Element selection in lists using initials

Using the numerical keys of the remote control you can jump into list, e.g., Internet radio station lists.

If the list is sorted in alphabetical order, you jump to the entered letter.

For example, when pressing the key 7 three times you jump to the first list element starting with letter R .

In case of numerical sorting, you can directly select the stations with the numerical keys.

If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear simultaneously.

(A) Selectable elements / menu items.

(B) The text in the line where the marker is currently located is white.

(C) Move the selection marking by means of the arrow keys to the menu item to be set.

The position of the marking is to see by a grey rectangle.

In most cases, the marked menu item will be automatically adopted. The font colour of the previously active item will change to grey, that of the newly selected item to white.

In a few menus, to confirm a selected menu item is required by pressing OK .

17

Reference 55-85

User manual


Entering characters with on-screen keyboard

For certain functions, entering letters or characters is required, e.g., for

Web addresses (URLs) in the browser or for renaming archive entries.

An on-screen keyboard appears for entering text.

Enter/change internet address Back

Adopt Cancel http://www.loewe.tv

q a y

1 2 www.

Space w x s e d c

3

.de

Delete v f r

4 t g b z h n u j m i k

.-/ o l

ABC

P

I

5

.com

6

Cancel

7

.net

8 9

.

Adopt

0

/

Table of characters for entering text by means of the remote control

9

0

7

8

4

5

6

Key

1

2

3

Characters (uppercase - lowercase)

[space] 1

A B C 2 Ä Æ Ã Å Ā À Á Ć Ç Č - a b c 2 ä æ ã å ā â à á ć ç č

D E F 3 Ė Ë Ē Ę Ê È É - d e f 3 ė ë ē ę ê è é

G H I 4 Ï Ī Į Î Ì Í - g h i 4 ï ī į î î ì í

J K L 5 - j k l 5

M N O 6 Ö O E Õ Ō Ô Ò Ó Ø - m n o 6 ń ñ ö o e õ ō ô ò ó ø

P Q R S 7 ß - p q r s 7 ß

T U V 8 Ü Ū Û Ù Ú - t u v 8 ü ū û ù ú

W X Y Z 9 - w x y z 9

. 0 - / _ : + , ; ? ! = & # % ~ @ $ * ’ ( ) ” § \ { } [ ] < > ´ ` ^ |

Select character / on-screen button,

OK Adopt character.

In the event of letters with a triangular, additional letters are displayed when pressing the OK button longer (2 sec).

For the selection of special characters use the .-/ field.

To conclude the entry:

Select Adopt ,


Entry of characters by remote control

Alternatively to the on-screen keyboard you can also enter the desired characters by means of the remote control (as with the keypad of a mobile phone).

Select text entry field.

Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line indicating the current input position.

Input position one character to the right (also for blanks).

Input position one character to the left.

Input the letters one after another. When using the remote control, press the numerical keys just as on a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol is displayed. The available letters are printed on the individual numeric buttons.

You find the exact key assignment in the character table in the right column.


Select Adopt ,


18

Reference 55-85

User manual

On-screen displays

Operation without remote control

Explanation of keys

An explanation of the main operating keys that can be used at the moment, can be displayed.

The availability of the key explanation is dependent on the currently active operating situation.

Operation without remote control

Changing Volume

+ / – Increase/reduce volume.

INFO press longer: show Explanation of keys.

Switching radio on or off or switching to radio

(2sec)

(2sec)

(2sec)

Timer list

Menu options

Station list

Expanded station list

Value-added service

Last station

Language / sound

Timeshift

Recording

Key explanation

Calling direct control on TV set

M Call direct control on TV set.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.

Explanation of symbols

On screen pages with operating symbols in the bottom line, an explanation of the function appears as soon as the symbol is selected.

USB1 -> CRW_7266b

Back

Operating mode

Station selection

AV selection

3D

Contrast

Picture format

Service

R Scroll

M Scroll up.

– Scroll left.

Close all displays

Automatic menu info

The automatic menu info provides an info text for the selected menu item appropriate to the on-screen display that can assist you further with the operation of your TV set.

An on-screen display is displayed.

Press M longer.

Explanations of the settings:

Operating mode

Switch between TV and radio operation.

...

Energy efficiency

Home Mode

Premium

Mode

Shop Mode

The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this

case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.

Stations selection

Call Station selection.

AV selection Select AV interface.

3D Calling 3D settings .

(1 .

Contrast Set contrast.

The power consumption of the TV set depends directly on the value set here.

The factory setting is that the info display is shown automatically for each menu item. In this case you can temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO key .

Picture format

Selecting the picture format.

Permanent clock display

The clock display can be permanently shown. It is always visible as long as no other display is made.

You can switch the permanent clock display on or off in Home view under System Settings

ט

Control

ט more ...

ט

On-screen displays .

Service The Service menu item is provided for service purposes by dealers only.

19

Reference 55-85

User manual

Initial installation

Initial installation wizard

Initial installation after switching on for the first time

The Initial installation wizard starts automatically with an initial installation. It may be called repeatedly again (see chapter System settings ,section Extras – Repeat initial installation ).

If a parental lock is activated, the access code must be entered before repeating initial installation (see chapter System settings , section Control – Parental lock ).

For information on navigation within the wizard refer to chapter

General information on menu operation .

First installation wizard routine

The selected settings affect the routine of the Initial installation wizard.

Menu language

Energy efficiency

INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language

Which menu language do you want to use for operation?

English (en)

ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)

Polski

Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)

(fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru)

Slovenš č ina (sl) Norsk (no)

(nl) č ina (sk) 中文 (zh)


Proceed with

Select desired Menu language .

Selecting the language of the user guidance is the wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the instructions on your TV screen.

Proceed to next step.

A licence agreement will be displayed.

Scroll through the licence agreement.

OK Confirm the licence agreement and proceed to the next step.

Energy efficiency

(continued)

Home mode:

The emphasis for home use is on low energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

Premium mode:

This mode optimises the settings to a brighter environment at a higher energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

The use of this energy efficiency setting must be confirmed afterwards once again.

Shop mode:

The picture settings are aligned to operation in the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the energy consumption is not reduced.


The presetting can be changed later in the System settings under Control

ט

Energy efficiency .


Location of

TV set

Location of TV set

Please specify the location of your TV set so that the available stations can be sorted according to the specify country.

(DK) Denmark

(E) Spain

(F) France

(FIN) Finland

(H) Hungary

(IRL) Ireland

(L) Luxembourg

(N) Norway

(NL) Netherlands

(NZ) New Zealand

(P) Portugal

(PL) Poland

(RUS) Russia

(S) Sweden

(SK) Slovakia

(SLO) Slovenia

(TR) Turkey

(UK) United Kingdom

Back with Proceed with

Select Location of TV set (national defaults are adopted).

For certain locations (e.g., Australia), there is finally a selection screen where you can indicate in which state/territory the device is being operated.


Energy efficiency

Here you define how energy efficiently you operate your TV. With the "Home Mode" setting you put the focus on low energy consumption for home use. The "Premium Mode" is optimised to a brighter environment with a higher energy consumption. The "Shop

Mode" is designed for operation in a showroom.

Note: If you select "Home Mode" here, the TV set will automatically switch off to save energy after no longer being operated for 4 hours.

Home mode Premium mode Shop mode


Operating mode

Operating mode

Please specify if you wish to use the full TV function of your set, or if you wish to use it purely as a monitor.

As TV set As monitor only


Select Energy efficiency.

Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting) is adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated depending on the presetting.

The automatic shutdown is active in the mode

Home Mode .

Select the Operating mode .

Use the TV set as a TV set :

Continued with Connect antennas cable(s) (see next page).

Use the TV set just as a monitor : see chapter Initial installation , section TV set as a monitor

20

Reference 55-85

User manual


Connect antennas cable(s)

Connect antenna cable(s)

Your television will automatically search for stations. With , highlight which antenna cables are available for your TV set and connect them to the correct antenna sockets, which are specified here in the right-hand column.

Antenna cable(s) for: to antenna socket(s):

Cable analog ANT


Select antenna cable.

OK Connect/disconnect antenna cable.

Select the antenna cables that are connected to your TV.

Ahead of each selected antenna, the symbol appears.

Cable analog:

Terrestrial (DVB-T):

analogue stations via cable

digital stations via antenna

Cable (DVB-C): digital stations via cable

Satellite (DVB-S/cable 1): digital stations via satellite

Satellite (DVB-S/cable 2): digital stations via satellite


The rest of the initial installation wizard routine depends on the selected antennas (Cable analogue,

DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S) in step Connect antennas cable(s) .

The different antennas/types of reception are described in the following sections of initial installation.

Setting options for reception via Cable analog:

If you have not selected Cable analog in step Connect antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting options for DVB-T reception .

TV/col. standard

TV/col. standard

Please select the TV/colour standard.

BG+L SECAM-BG

PAL-BG SECAM-DK

PAL-DK SECAM-L

PAL-I NTSC


The selection of a Colour standard is only required when the Location of TV set Other country was selected. Otherwise, the country-specific default settings will be preset when selecting the Location of TV set. This step will be skipped then

Select appropriate colour standard.


21

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for DVB-T reception:

If you have not selected Terrestrial (DVB-T) in step Connect antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section

Setting options for DVB-C reception .

Network selection

Network selection (DVB-T)

Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.

Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.

Freeview other network


Supply voltage

Settings

If several networks are available via DVB-T, you can decide which network you want to receive your channels from.

OK

Select network,

Confirm selection.


DVB-T settings



Scrambled stations

Search method


Back with Proceed with no yes

Channel search Frequency search

Supply voltage DVB-T antenna

Please state here whether your DVB-T antenna needs a supply voltage. Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply voltage on the antenna line.

no (0V) yes (5V)


Select supply voltage no / yes .

If you use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply voltage (active antenna) and which is not already supplied via a power adaptor, then select yes (5V) for the antenna’s power supply.

How to align your DVB-T antenna is described in chapter System settings , section Connections

– Antenna DVB .


Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.

Scrambled stations

You can state whether coded stations are to be searched for in the search/update.

Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.

However, these stations can only be received in connection with a CA module and the appropriate

Smart Card.

The handling of the CA module is described in the chapter System settings , section Extras – CA module .

Search method

If you want to run the station search independently of the channel grid, select Frequency search for the search method.

Accept

Logical

Channel

Number

In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T) are transmitted with a preset channel number per station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).

If you select yes here, these default channel slots will be used and the channels of the preferred signal source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the station list can no longer be shifted.


22

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for DVB-C reception:

If you have not selected Cable (DVB-C) in step Connect antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting options for DVB-S reception .

Network selection

Network selection (DVB-C)



Unitymedia

Standard


Network ID If you select none here, DVB signals of all current transmitter networks are searched automatically

(recommended for most cable networks).

If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID

(necessary in the cable networks of some countries), only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are searched for automatically.

Your cable provider has the information you need.

Accept

Logical

Channel

Number

In various countries, digital stations (DVB-C) are transmitted with a preset channel number per station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).



Settings

If several networks are available via DVB-C, you can decide which network you want to receive your channels from.

The normal DVB-C settings are derived from the selection of the location or network and do not need to be changed.

Exactly which of the following settings are present is dependent on which network is selected.

Select network.

OK Confirm selection.


DVB-C settings



Scrambled stations yes search Frequency search

044.00

Network ID none 00000

Accept Logical Channel Number no yes


Select and adapt settings for DVB-C reception.

Scrambled stations




Smart Card.

The handling of the CA module is described in the chapter System settings , section Extras – CA module .

Search method

If you select Frequency search here, a search is performed for all receivable stations.

With Network search , only the stations which the networks supply are searched - either for all receivable networks or only for the particular network specified under Network ID .

Start frequency

The DVB stations are only searched for in the frequency range above the start frequency.

23

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for DVB-S reception:

If you have not selected Satellite (DVB-S/cable x) in step Connect antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section

Setting options for all types of reception .

Network selection

Network selection (DVB-S)


ASTRA LCN

Standard

Back with Proceed with other communal installation

Select setting if the TV set is connected to a single-cable system (without DiSEqC). Several

Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.

Contrary to a DiSEqC one cable communal system there are restrictions in the range of certain reception frequencies in "common" single-cable community systems.


The rest of the initial installation wizard routine depends on the selected satellite system in step Select satellite installation .

The different satellite systems are described in the following sections of initial installation.

Select satellite installation

Select network.

If several networks are available via DVB-S, you can decide which network you want to receive your channels from.


Select satellite installation

Please define which satellites you receive or which satellite equipment you use.

Single satellite

2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox

2 satellites on toneburst switch

Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch

DiSEqC one cable communal system

Other communal installation

Indietro con Avanti con

Selecting the satellite system.

Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your dealer in this regard.

The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the selection of the location and do not need to be changed in most cases.

Single satellite

Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC

(LNB).

2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox

Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs

(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22 kHz switchbox.

2 satellites on toneburst switch

Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs

(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a toneburst switch.

Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch

The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are connected.

DiSEqC one cable communal system

Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several

Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.

24

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):

Select single satellite

Select satellites

Please specify here which satellite you receive.

Optus D1160°E

Türksat 42°E

Hellas Sat2 39°E

Eutelsat 36A 36°E

Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E

ASTRA2 28,2°E

ASTRA3 23,5°E


ASTRA1 19,2°E

Eutelsat 16A 16°E

Hot Bird 13°E

Eurobird 9A 9°E

Eurobird 7A 7°E

ASTRA4A 4,8°E

Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8

Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W

Nilesat 7°W

Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W



Telestart12 12,5°W

Intelsat901 18°W

Dual/single band

Select satellite,



Dual/single band (ASTRA1 19,2°E)

Here, please specify whether you are using a Dual Band (Universal) LNB or a Single Band

LNB.

Dual band (low/high) Single band


Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):

Satellite selection

Select satellites

Please select satellite 1 and satellite 2.

Satellit 1 Satellit 2 none

Optus D1160°E

Türksat 42°E

Hellas Sat2 39°E

Eutelsat 36A 36°E


ASTRA2 28,2°E

ASTRA3 23,5°E

ASTRA1 19,2°E

Eutelsat 16A 16°E

Hot Bird 13°E

Eurobird 9A 9°E

Eurobird 7A 7°E

ASTRA4A 4,8°E




Nilesat 7°W




Telestart12 12,5°W

LNC frequency

(22 kHz

Switch box)

Mark Satellite 1 / Satellite 2 ,

select satellite.

OK Adopt settings.


LNB frequencies

Please select the LNB frequency for the Low Band.

Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.

ASTRA1 19,2°E Low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

Hot Bird 13°E Low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz


LNC frequencies

Select Dual band (low/high) or Single band .

Here you specify if you use a Dual Band (Universal)

LNB or a Single LNB.


LNC frequencies

(Toneburst switch)

LNB frequencies

Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.


ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz


OK

Set LNB frequencies.

Adopt settings.

The setting of the LNB frequency is only called when you have used the setting Single band in step Dual / single band .

Normally, you do not need to change the values for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency (important for the frequency display).


Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued) .

LNB frequencies

Please specify the oscillator frequency/frequencies of your LNB.

ASTRA1 19,2°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

ASTRA1 19,2°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz

Hot Bird 13°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

Hot Bird 13°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz



OK Adopt settings.

Normally, you do not need to change the values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency (important for the frequency display).



25

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for the satellite system

(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):

DiSEqC multiple switch

Settings DiSEqC multiple switch

With the refresh rate you determine how often a DiSEqC command is output. This is only necessary in a cascaded system. Your system provider will bei able to tell you more about this.

Repeat rate none 1 2

Control voltage 13 / 18V off on

22kHz signal Band Position off

Toneburst off Position Option


Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC multiswitch.

OK Adopt settings.

Repeat rate The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC command is output. A refresh is only necessary with cascaded systems.

Control voltage

The control voltage controls the switching of the polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC capable components (e.g., control of single LNBs via

DiSEqC multiswitch).

22kHz signal The 22 kHz signal controls the switching between high and low band in the Band setting. The Position setting controls the selection of the satellites in non-

DiSEqC capable components.

Toneburst The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites in non-DiSEqC but Toneburst capable components with the Position and Option settings.

LNC frequencies

.

.

LNB frequencies

Please select the LNB frequencies for both High and Low Bands.

Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.

ASTRA1 19,2°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

ASTRA1 19,2°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz

Hot Bird 13°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

Hot Bird 13°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz

Eutelsat W2 16°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

Eutelsat W2 16°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz

Türksat 42°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

Türksat 42°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz



Normally, you do not need to change the values.

OK Adopt settings.



Satellite selection


Select satellites

Please select satellite 1 to satellite 4.

Satellit 1 Satellit 2 Satellit 3 Satellit 4 none

Optus D1160°E

Türksat 42°E

Hellas Sat2 39°E

Eutelsat 36A 36°E


ASTRA2 28,2°E

ASTRA3 23,5°E

ASTRA1 19,2°E

Eutelsat 16A 16°E

Hot Bird 13°E

Eurobird 9A 9°E

Eurobird 7A 7°E

ASTRA4A 4,8°E




Nilesat 7°W




Telestart12 12,5°W

Mark Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4 ,

Select satellite.

OK Adopt settings.


26

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for the satellite system

(DiSEqC one cable communal system):

Number of system channel used

Number of system channels used

Do you wish to use one or two transmission channels in your single cable communal installation? With two channels - provided they are available to you from the installation - it is possible to watch different stations at the same time in the main screen and in the PIP.

One channel Two channels

Retour avec Continuer avec

LNB frequencies

.

LNB frequencies

Please specify the oscillator frequency for the Low Band. High band frequency is auotm. adjusted


ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

ASTRA1 19,2°E high Band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz


DiSEqC one cable communal installation

Select One channel or Two channels .

The number of system channels can be selected only when just one DVB-S antenna cable is used when selecting antennas.

Here you specify if you use one or two transmission channels in your one cable communal system.

In case of two channels - as far as they are available in your system - different stations can be simultaneously viewed on the main picture and on PIP.

You get more information on your system from your dealer.


Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation

Please enter here which DiSEqC single cable system you are using. The following setting parameters of your system are then adapted accordingly.

User defined DELTA

Manual registration

(for socket

ANT SAT)

OK Adopt settings.


Normally, you do not need to change the values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency

(important for the frequency display).


Manual registration (for socket ANT SAT)

Please log on to your DiSEqC single-cable system that is connected to the antenna input

ANT SAT and specify the desired transmission channel and associated transmission frequency. Please also indicate whether your single-cable system has a broad frequency band instead of a division into high and low band. If your antenna system is designed for this, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from being used by other participants by having a PIN.

Transmission channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Transmission frequency 1284 MHz 1400 MHz 1516 MHz 1632 MHz 1748 MHz

PIN protection Ja Nein

Define/change PIN 000


Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC single cable communal installation.

OK Adopt settings.

The manual registration must be made for both ANT

SAT jacks when either two DVB-S antenna cables or two system channels are used.


Satellite selection

Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation.


Select satellites



none

Optus D1160°E

Türksat 42°E

Hellas Sat2 39°E

Eutelsat 36A 36°E


ASTRA2 28,2°E

ASTRA3 23,5°E

ASTRA1 19,2°E

Eutelsat 16A 16°E

Hot Bird 13°E

Eurobird 9A 9°E

Eurobird 7A 7°E

ASTRA4A 4,8°E



Nilesat 7°W




Telestart12 12,5°W


Transmission channel

Select the desired transmission channel.

Transmission frequency

Select the corresponding transmission frequency.

PIN protection If your system is designed for it, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from use by other subscribers with a PIN.

Define/ change PIN

Here you can determine and change the PIN for

PIN protection. Only possible, when yes has been selected for PIN protection.



Select satellites from list,



27

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for the satellite system (other communal installation):

Select single satellite

Select satellites


Optus D1160°E

Türksat 42°E

Hellas Sat2 39°E

Eutelsat 36A 36°E


ASTRA2 28,2°E

ASTRA3 23,5°E


ASTRA1 19,2°E

Eutelsat 16A 16°E

Hot Bird 13°E

Eurobird 9A 9°E

Eurobird 7A 7°E

ASTRA4A 4,8°E



Nilesat 7°W




Telestart12 12,5°W

Intelsat901 18°W

LNB frequencies,

Supply voltage

Select satellite.



LNB frequency, supply voltage

Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.

If your TV set is connected to a single cable system without an external power supply, you can connect the antenna supply (13 or 18V/max. 350mA) with „13V“ or „18V“.

ASTRA1 19,2°E 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz

Supply voltage off 13V 18V


Select and adapt settings.

LNC frequency

Normally, you do not need to change the values for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency

(important for the frequency display).

Supply voltage

If your set is connected to a single-cable system without external voltage supply, you can connect the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 500mA).


Proceed to section Setting options for all types of reception .

28

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):

Test reception

You should now receive a picture and sound from the following satellite:

Astra1 19,2°E C/N

Otherwise, please adjust your antenna. If it is already correctly adjusted, please continue all the same, without receiving picture or sound for the moment.


Settings

After you have made the previous settings, you should receive picture and sound of the selected satellites

(only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).


DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)



Scrambled stations no yes

Search method

Symbol rate


Network search

22000 no yes

Frequency search

Select and adapt settings.

If several satellites are received, the following settings must be made for every satellite. The type of settings available may differ depending on the selected satellite or network.

Scrambled stations




Smart Card.

Handling of the CA module is described in chapter

System settings , section Extras – CA module .

Search method

If you select Frequency search here, a search is performed for all receivable stations. With Network search , from all receivable networks all the stations are searched which are supplied by these networks.

Depending on the selected network, this step might possibly be skipped.

Symbol rate The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider and normally does not need to be changed.

Accept

Logical

Channel

Number

In various countries, digital stations (DVB-S) are transmitted with a preset channel number per station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).



Proceed to section Setting options for all types of reception .

29

Reference 55-85

User manual


Setting options for all types of reception:

Subtitle and audio languages

(DVB only)

Subtitle and audio languages (DVB)

You can preset the desired languages and reserve languages for subtitles and audio for

DVB programmes here.

You may preset whether you would always like to hear a special tone for visually-impaired persons (if provided by the station), which describes the operation in more detail, with the aid of an audio commentary. In "System Settings -> Sound," you can set its volume in relation to the "normal" volume by means of the "Audio commentary volume."

Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB) Audio commentary

Favoured language Alternative language

German Italian Czech Hungarian S


Check search settings

Select desired languages and alternative languages for subtitles and audio for DVB programmes.

Set up audio commentary for the visually impaired.



Check search settings

Your TV performs the following automatic search with the listed settings. If you wish to correct them, please scroll back.

Location of TV set (UK) United Kingdom

Satellite(s)

Start automatic search Antenne Wizard Cancel

Back with

Adopt with

OK

Age-related lock

.

.

Age-related lock

If you enter an age restriction here, all DVB programmers are locked which have an appropriate age code and can only be watched by entering the access code.

No age-related lock Special security level

Proceed with

Time and date

Select Age-related lock.


You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.

DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age identification are locked and can only be watched after entering the access code.

In some countries, the yes/no option does not exist for some channels, and a compulsory age check must be entered.


Time and date

Please enter the date and time if none has been entered or if they are incorrect.

Date 14.01.2015

Time 16:30:00


Info station search

You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go back step by step with the key to make any changes to the settings.

OK Start automatic search.

Now, the TV set searches for TV and radio stations.

It searches successively for stations from the selected signal sources. The progress of search is shown by a progress bar.

In case of a repeated initial installation routine (via

Home view under System settings p all stored stations will be first deleted here.

Extras )

Result TV

The automatic station search and sort have been stopped.

1164 new TV station(s) has (have) been found.

Proceed with

The data capture for time and date is set to automatic ex factory.

If time and date are automatically obtained via the receive path, no entry is necessary.

For more information, see the chapter System settings , section Control – Time and Date .


The number of found TV stations is displayed.


The number of found radio stations is displayed.


continued on the next page p

30

Reference 55-85

User manual


Sound playback via ...

Sound playback via ...

Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your TV sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if necessary).

TV speakers

HiFi/AV amplifier

HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)


Inform about new software

Software-Update

You have the option of performing a software update via the Internet. Please specify whether the TV set is to automatically inform you about newly available software.

In accordance with the local laws and regulations, we would like to point out that set numbers, the installation location of your TV set, previous updates and the current software version will be processed and stored by an IT system, if you wish to perform software updates via the Internet. This data ensures that we are always able to offer you an optimum service. All data is treated as confidential.

Note: you can change this setting at any time by selecting the following options: "System

Settings -> Control->Software update -> via Internet"."

Inform about new software Do not inform

Back with Finish wizard with

Network configuration

Select sound components.


This selection indicates which sound components you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending on the selection, the sound component wizard starts with which you can make further settings.

The sound component wizard is described in chapter System settings , section Connections –

Sound components and can also be started at any time beyond the initial installation.


Select option.

When selecting Information on new software updates , your TV set checks at definite intervals whether a newer software than the one installed in the

TV set is available in the Internet. A screen message appears when a new software update is found.

Back: Exit wizard .

The initial installation wizard is complete.

TV set as a monitor

You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.

Network configuration

Please specify if you wish to configure a network at this time. You can also perform this at a more convenient time later (via 'System settings->Multimedia->Netzworksettings-

>Networking').

Configure now Do not configure or configure later

Selection of Switch-on channel

Please specify which AV channel your TV set should switch on to.

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

PC IN

AVS

AV

VIDEO


Select option.

With the selection, specify whether you want to configure the available network adaptor now.

Configure now: Make settings for network adaptor and proxy server (see chapter System settings ,section Multimedia / Network –

Network settings ).

Do not configure or configure later: Skip network adaptor configuration.


Select AV connection.

The selected AV connection is shown when switching the TV on.


Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup.

31

Reference 55-85

User manual

Home view

Home view Home view - Favourites

The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s operating modes.

The list of options on the left gives you access to the operating modes

TV, Video, Audio/Radio, Photo and Web . By means of System settings you have access to more functions and you can configure your TV set.

The right part of the screen displays the favourites depending on the selected operating mode (see also right column) and the available sources.

The number of selectable items varies depending on the TV equipment, network connection, available media/media servers and connected gadgets.

Call Home view

You will find your favourites on the right of the individual operating modes.

By selecting the operating mode, the favourites are filtered accordingly.

When selecting Home, the favourites of all operating modes are displayed together.

After an initial installation, some favourites will already be automatically created depending on the installation site of the TV set and of existing Internet links (e.g. TV stations, online links).

Creating favourites

In the operating modes of the TV set you can define the current object

(e.g. station, music title, teletext page, website, photo, etc.) as favourite.

In the selected operating mode, the active object will be added as favourite and placed at the end.

HOME: Calling the Home view.

Create favourite.

If there are more favourites than can be shown on one page, this will be indicated by rectangular symbols in the upper line of Home view. Example:

Home

TV

Video

Audio/Radio

Photo

Web

Das Erste HD

ProSieben VOX

RTL Television kabel eins

SAT.1

arte HD

Three pages with favourites exist. The first page of them is indicated. Equivalent is the display with the symbols for the source selection.

Loewe channel

THE LIBERATION OF ART

LUMAS YouTube

P+/P– Scrolling through the individual pages.

System settings

OK call.

Select menu item / Favourite / Source,

Description of the individual sections/functions:

Editing favourites

You can edit the existing favourites in Home view. Change the sequence of your favourites as you wish or delete favourites you do not need any more.


Home: Under the item Home all favourites of the different sections are summarized.

Select the favourite to be changed.

TV: You can access the TV favourites and a variety of sources such as Station lists, EPG, Timer) via the item TV .

See chapter TV for further information.

Video: The item Video gives you access to videos from local (USB, home network) and online sources.

See chapter Video for further information.

Audio/Radio: With item Audio/Radio you find music files from your local server(s) and USB storage media as well as from DVB and Internet radio.

See chapter Audio/Radio for further information.

Photo: Via menu item Photo you can view photos from your local media on your TV screen.

See chapter Photo for further information.

Web: Here you have access to multimedia content in the

Internet (MediaNet) as well as a high-quality web browser.

See chapter Web for further information.

System settings: In menu item System settings you find the configuration menu of the TV set e.g., with settings for picture, sound, connections or sound components.

See chapter System settings for further information.

MENU: Change favourite.

Move favourite or delete it (see below).

Moving favourites

Move favourite to new position.

BACK: Finish procedure.

Deleting favourites

TEXT: Delete selected favourite.

BACK: Finish procedure.

Home view - Sources

To the right of your favourites, if any, you will find the selection of sources in the individual operating modes.

Depending on the operating mode, this can be, for example, different station lists (analogue, DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S, AV-list, extended station list), DVB radio, Internet radio, timer list, MediaNet, external USB storage devices, media servers on the network or the DR+ archive of the internal hard disk.

32

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Volume / Station

TV

In TV mode that can be selected via the Home overview, you can use the basic TV functions of your TV set. In TV mode you will have numerous functionalities at your disposal as, for instance, PIP, EPG and, if offered by the station, HbbTV (hybrid broadcast broadband television).

By means of the function list you may call additional options and settings all around TV operation.

Setting the volume

Selecting a station out of the station list

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

OK Call station list.

ASTRA1

19,2°E

8 Das Erste HD

20:15 - 21:45 Tatort

9 ZDF HD

20:15 - 22:45 Toskana

22:45 - 23:20 Bilder der Wissenschaft

10 BR Nord HD

21:15 - 21:45 Vor Ort - Die Reportage

11 SAT.1

20:14 - 22:19 Lizzy und die Kommisare

12 RTL Television

21:15 - 22:15 Dr. House

13 n-tv

14 ProSieben

21:15 - 22:15 The Big Bang Theory

15 3satHD

20:45 - 21:45 Erlebnis Natur

16 ARTE HD

21:30 17.07.2014

Digital 2

Switching sound off/on

Sound off.

Sound on: Press key again or increase the volume using V+ .

Setting the volume

V+/V– Volume up/down.

The volume control bar will be displayed in the upper right corner.

The volume control bar can be deactivated in the menu System settings

ט

Control

ט more ...

ט

On-screen displays .

Select station

Select station with P+ / P–

When using Instant Channel Zapping, you can very quickly switch to other stations. The instant channel zapping technology uses the second tuner in the background in order to pre-select the next stations. Due to this pre-selection, you can now switch to this channel within a very short time.

While using the digital recorder DR+ (timeshift operation, archive recording, multi recording) or in PIP mode, Instant Channel Zapping is not available. Switching is done at „normal“ speed.

For encrypted stations Instant Channel Zapping is only possible to a limited extent.

P+/P– Station up/down.

The number and the name of the station along with the title of the programme and that of the next programme will be briefly shown. Also, the status display with time/ date and programme-dependent symbols appears.

The symbols of the status display are described in chapter TV , section Status display .

OK

Mark stations.

The marked station will be called.

Changing the station list


OK Call station list,

call overview of station lists.

DVB-C

ASTRA1

19,2°E

Personal list 1

AV list

Manage list

8 Das Erste HD

20:15 - 21:45 Tatort

9 ZDF HD

20:15 - 22:45 Toskana


10 BR Nord HD


11 SAT.1


12 RTL Television

21:15 - 22:15 Dr. House

13 n-tv

21:30 20.12.2014

Digital 2

14 ProSieben


15 3satHD


16 ARTE HD

Mark the desired list.

The station list will be changed according to the selection. The list will be adopted automatically.

Move to the newly selected list.

Explanations of the station lists:

The number and the names of the possible station lists depend on the available signal sources (antennas, TV reception networks, etc.).

Select station using the numerical keys

If you select an unoccupied station position, the next available station is selected.

long short short long

all short

1-digit stations

Press the numerical key a little bit longer: The channel will change immediately or press the numerical key briefly, the station changes after 2 seconds

(changes immediately if up to 9 stations are stored).

2-digit and 3-digit stations

Press first (and second) numerical key briefly. Keep the last numerical key depressed a little bit longer: The channel will change immediately or: press all the numerical keys briefly, the channel changes two seconds after the last number has been entered (with up to 99 or 999 saved channels it will change immediately).

4-digit stations

Press all four numerical keys briefly, the station changes immediately.

ASTRA LCN

Analogue

DVB-C

DVB-T

Only stations from the selected source / reception network are indicated in the station list.

Personal list Only stations of the selected personal list are indicated in the station list. The name of the list may be changed.

AV list Exclusively AV inputs are shown in the station list.

Manage list Call up the station list editing menu ( System settings ט Stations ט Station lists TV ).

continued on the next page

ט

33

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Station

Selecting stations by means of the expanded station list



call function list.

Mark expanded station list ,

call expanded station list.


2 ZDF HD

21:00-21:45

Toskana

1 Das Erste HD

2 ZDF HD

3 BR Nord HD

4 SAT.1

5 RTL

6 n-tv

7 ProSieben

8 3sat HD

9 ARTE HD

10 EinsPlus

11 Eurosport

12 ZDF Neo HD

A..Z

Search < ASTRA LCN > < All stations >

13 ZDF.kultur HD

14 ZDFinfokanal HD

15 SAT.1 HD

16 RTL HD

17 ProSieben HD

18 VOX HD

19 kabel eins HD

20 SUPER RTL HD

21 N24 HD

22 TELE5 HD

23 SPORT1 HD

24 NICK/CC HD

Back

Selecting stations by personal lists

You can save your preferred stations in personal lists (e.g., for several users). Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations.

Personal list available (creating a new personal list via Manage list

ט

New personal list ).

In normal TV mode, without other displays.


Open overview of station lists.

ASTRA1

19,2°E

Personal list 1

10 Das Erste HD

20:15 - 21:45 Tatort

11 ZDF HD

20:15 - 22:45 Unterwegs


AV list

Manage list

12 RTL Television

21:15 - 22:15 Dr. House

13 SAT.1


14 3satHD


15 BR Nord HD


16 ProSieben


21:30 20.12.2014

Digital 2

P+/P– Scrolling in the station list page by page.

OK

Or:

Mark stations.


For numerical sorting: Enter the channel number. The marker will jump to the selected station.

Mark the desired personal list,

The station list will be changed according to the selection. The list will be adopted automatically.

Move to the newly selected list.

Mark the station.

OK The marked station will be called. Or:

Select station directly with numerical keys .

OK The marked station will be called.

For alphabetical sorting: Enter the first letter. The first station for the specified letters is marked.

Explanation of the icons following the station names:

OK

Mark the station.


Filter and sort options of the expanded station list

Using the on-screen buttons on the bottom line of the expanded station list you can filter and sort the station list by various options.

MENU: Switching between list and bottom line.

Locked station.

HDTV station.

DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna).

DVB-C station (digital via cable).

DVB-S station (digital via satellite).

Scrambled station.

0..9

Numerical sorting of the station list.

A..Z

Alphabetical sorting of the station list.

Searching This allows you to do targeted searches for stations.

The station name is to be entered via the on-screen keyboard. The entry is described in chapter General information on the operation .

Signal source

Select the signal source, the stations of which are to be displayed in the extended station list (e.g.,

Analogue, DVB-C, DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, Personal station list, AV list).

All stations Here you can filter the content of the station list according to various criteria. Shall All Stations , only HD stations , stations that are Locked or

Scrambled or Unscrambled , CI+ Protected stations be indicated.

History

Recently selected stations are saved in History.


Yellow button: call History.

Das Erste HD

ZDF HD

VOX

Select entry,

OK call.

The last station can also be accessed directly:

Yellow button press longer: Call last station.

34

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Status display

Status display


INFO: Show status display.

General symbols:

9 ZDF HD

20:15 - 21:45 Toskana

21:45 - 22:00 heute -journal

3D programme.

HDTV programme.

HbbTV mode available from this station.

21:30 20.12.2014

Digital 2

(2sec)

(2sec)

(2sec)

Timer list

Menu options

Station list


Value-added service

Last station

Language / sound

Timeshift

Recording

Key explanation

In the left upper corner you will see in the marked field the number and name of the station, the transmission time and (if available) the title of the current programme.

The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the current programme. If information about the current programme is available, this can be called by pressing the INFO key again.

In another adjacent field to the right, the programme info of the following programme is displayed additionally for DVB stations.

The field in the upper right corner contains the time, the date and, depending on the DVB station and according to availability, various additional information, which is represented by symbols (see column on the right).

A window with button descriptions is displayed in the bottom right corner. The automatic display of the

Explanation of keys with status display can be switched off via System settings

ט

Control

ט more ...

ט

On-screen displays

ט

Key explanation .

By pressing the INFO key longer the Explanation of keys can be displayed regardless of the status display

(see also chapter On-screen displays , section

Explanation of keys ).

The status display is shown automatically every time you change channels.

The status display is hidden automatically at the end of the display time.

If you want to hide the status display manually before the display time ends, you can do this with the BACK key .

Explanations of the symbols in the status display:

Language/sound selection available.

Subtitles available.

Channel selection for multi-channel providers.

Explanations of the symbols in the status display (continued):

Transmitted audio signal:

Mono Mono audio transmission analogue.

Dual channel

Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2) analogue.

1+1

Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2) digital.

Stereo

Stereo (AAC+)

ܐ

Stereo sound transmission analogue.

Stereo sound transmission (HEAAC).

Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM).

۲ Digital Dolby digital sound transmission (DD).

۲ Digital+ Dolby digital sound transmission (DD+).

۲ Digital (AAC+) Dolby digital AAC+ sound transmission (HEAAC).

۲ TrueHD Dolby digital True HD sound transmission.

dts DTS ® / DTS-HD ® sound transmission.

MPEG MPEG sound transmission.

۲ PLII Dolby Pro Logic II sound transmission.

۲ VS Ref Dolby Virtual Speaker Reference display.

۲ VS Wide Dolby Virtual Speaker Wide.

Transmitted audio channels:

܂

܆

DD 1.0 / DTS

DD 2.0 / DTS

®

®

1.0 / Mono

2.0 / MPEG 2.0

܉

܈

܋

܍

܅

܏

ۿ

ۿ

DD 3.0 / DTS

DD 4.0 / DTS

DD 5.0 / DTS

DD 2.1 / DTS

DD 3.1 / DTS

DD 4.1 / DTS

DD 5.1 / DTS

DD 7.1

®

®

®

®

®

®

®

3.0

4.0

5.0

2.1

3.1

4.1

5.1

Selected listening mode:

܃

܃

Playback of centre sound or mono (left/right).

Playback of front sound (L/R stereo).

܃

܃

Playback of front and centre sound.

Playback of front and surround sound.

܃

܃6RXQG projector

܃([WHUQDO speakers

Playback of front, surround and centre sound.

Playback of sound via sound projector.

Playback of sound via speakers connected to an external amplifier.

If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the sound of missing speakers is transmitted by the existing speakers (virtually). The Dolby

Virtual speaker (VS mode) developed by Dolby is activated for the virtual sound reproduction in sound mode (4) and (5) . Here you can choose between Dolby Virtual and Cinema Surround. In sound mode (3) , proprietory settings of Loewe are used for the virtual reproduction.

35

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Function list / AV list

Function list (TV mode)

The function list contains settings and additional options. Die individual

List items will be briefly explained as follows:

The function list can be opened for the current station or the selected station list. Depending on this, some list items may possibly not be available.

Function list for the current station:

MENU: Call function list.

Function list for the selected station list:


call function list.

Explanations of the symbols in the function list (continued):

Call Edit station list .

Delete stations, shift stations, restore deleted stations.

Menu item is displayed only when the function list for the station list is opened (see left column).

Call Rename .

The name of analogue stations and the designations of the connections in the AV list can be changed.

Call Store stations .

Add current station to a favourites list.

The menu item is only shown, when at least one favourites list is available.

9 ZDF HD

20:15 - 21:45 Toskana


You can open the entire station list

in full screen mode here. It can be filtered in accordance with specific criteria.

Subtitles

Recording

Sound mode

AV list (AV Source)

Selecting the AV source via the AV list


Open station list AV list .

AV list

Select function,

OK call.

Explanations of the symbols in the function list:

Open Expanded station list .

6 AVS

Call up Language / sound . The available sound formats and their designations depend on the programme being broadcast.

Menu item will only be indicated when several languages/ sound tracks are available.

Call up Subtitles selection.

Menu item will only be indicated when subtitles are available.

Open recording dialogue to programme a Recording .

Select desired connection,

OK switch over.

If the selected AV source provides a signal (picture), it should be visible now.

When selecting VIDEO , you switch to the signal source

Cable analogue , channel E36 . The TV set can display the signal from an external source via the antenna input

TV ANT .

Set Sound mode (number of speakers).

Call up

Call up

Sound settings

Call up and adjust

Activate PIP .

.

Headphone volume

Picture settings .

.

Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen is off)

To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player), the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.

Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the

TV set.

Open station list AV list .


OK press at least for two seconds.

Move picture vertically up/down.

Switch screen off.

Switching the screen ON again: OK , BACK or green coloured key .

The menu item is only shown when DVB radio, Internetradio or an AV source is active.

Add current station as Favourite to Home view.

Changes the Sorting between numerically and alphabetically.

Menu item is displayed only when the function list for the station list is opened (see above).

Selecting the AV source via the station list



Call overview of station lists.

Select AV list .

The AV list will be displayed.

Move to the AV list.

Select desired AV source,

OK switch to AV source.

36

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Electronic Programme Guide

Electronic Programme Guide – EPG

EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed programme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In addition programmes can be sorted according to certain topics, memorised, and also recordings can be programmed.

Meaning of the colours in the EPG

The coloured labels indicate the genre of the respective programme.

When filtering with genre selection in the header, the programmes of the selected genre will be highlighted.

Movies

News

Starting and ending EPG

EPG: Switch EPG on / off.

Show

Sports

13

17:30 - 18:00

Unter uns

17:15 - 18:00

Brisant

Today DVB-C News

17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00

18:00 - 18:50

SOKO Wismar

19:25 - 20:15

Küstenwache

19:40 - 20:15 18:00 - 18:30 18:30 18:45 19:05 - 19:40

Alles was zählt

18:00 - 18:50

Verbotene Liebe

18:50 - 19:45

17:29 - 17:59

16:55 - 17:55 taff

17:00 - 18:00

17:59 - 18:31 18:31 - 19:15 19:15 - 19:59 push - das SAT.1 Magazin

17:58 - 18:29

Die Simpsons

18:29 - 18:58

Die Simpsons

18:58 - 20:14

Galileo

18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00

Child

Music

Arts

Social

15

Education

EPG is only available for DVB stations.

The first time you start EPG, a wizard will start that guides you through the necessary presettings.

Depending on the number of stations selected for EPG, it may take some time until the programme information is displayed.

EPG wizard

In this dialogue you decide, for which station EPG data should be collected and displayed. With the number of stations the time for nocturnal data acquisition will increase. We recommend, also for reasons of distinctness to select only those stations, which you receive regularly.

EPG Operation

In the left column there is a list of stations of the selected source/station list (e.g. DVB-C, personal list). With the on-screen buttons in the header of the EPG you can select the day of the programme preview, change the source and filter the programmes as to their genre.

P+/P–

Hobby

Series

Scrolling in the station list page by page.

When the EPG is started for the first time:

Continue in the wizard and call up the EPG Station selection.

MENU: Switch between the station list and the on-screen buttons in the bottom line.

Changing the station list:

Mark station list in the bottom line,

OK select desired station list.

Scrolling in the station list.

Scrolling through the programmes.

OK short: (highlighted TV programme is running):

EPG will be closed and the programme is selected.

short: (highlighted programme not yet started):

Detailed information on the selected programme will be called.

long: Change preview image to the station of the highlighted programme.

INFO: short: Call detailed information on the selected programme (see next page).

long: show Explanation of keys.

Select station for EPG:

Mark the the single station,

OK Select / deselect station for EPG.

For display in the EPG, the selected stations are marked with a check mark .

REC: Schedule the recording of the highlighted programme.

Control in header:

MENU: Go to header.

Or:

Select Mark all .

OK All stations of the station list will be activated for EPG.

OK

Mark selection of date, source, genre.

Accept changes.

Or:

Select Unmark all .

OK No station is activated for EPG.

MENU: Move from date to genre or from genre to station list.

37

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV


Switching to the current broadcast

Mark current broadcast.

OK press briefly: switch to current broadcast.

The electronic programme guide will be closed.

Programme preview

Mark desired station in the station list.

OK press long: show preview.

In the top left window, the current programme of the selected station is displayed now.

Calling additional information about the programmes

INFO: Call up detailed information.

Detailed info

5 ProSieben

Back

5 ProSieben 20.12.14

16:30-16:58 How I Met Your Mother

Eine Halloween-Party auf dem Dach seines Wohnhauses steht bevor, und auch dieses Jahr lässt sich Ted das Ereignis nicht entgehen. Doch eigentlich hofft er, ein Mädchen, das er vor vier Jahren dort getroffen hat, endlich wiederzusehen.

Barney findet die Idee völlig dämlich und versucht, seinen Freund zu einer

Party bei Victoria‘s Secret zu überreden. Ted gibt die Hoffnung nicht auf, doch dann taucht spät abends eine ganz andere Frau auf dem Dach auf und gesellt sich zu ihm ...

View Timer list

Jumping to time or station

The marking must be in the station list.

Press the numerical key (0 through 9). The window

Select Time/Station is shown.

If there is more information on the selected programme, it will be indicated here. You find further information on the indicated programme in the bottom line:

13

15

17:30 - 18:00

Unter uns

17:15 - 18:00

Brisant

Today DVB-C

17:46 18:00 19:00

18:00 - 18:50

SOKO Wismar

19:25 - 20:15

Küstenwache

22:00

19:40 - 20:15 18:00 - 18:30 18:30 18:45 19:05 - 19:40

Alles was zählt

18:00 - 18:50

Verbotene Liebe

18:50 - 19:45

17:29 - 17:59

16:55 - 17:55 taff

17:00 - 18:00


17:58 - 18:29

Die Simpsons

18:29 - 18:58

Die Simpsons

18:58 - 20:14

Galileo

18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00

Select time or station,

When entering a time, you always jump to the next occurrence of the entered time (24-hour window).

If the time is already passed today, the time entered will appear on the following day.

Always enter five digits for station presets, e.g.

00001 for preset 1 or 00134 for preset 134.

View Watch selected TV programme.

The menu item is only available when the selected programme is on the air.

Memorise Memorise the programme for later watching / listening. For further information see next page.

This menu item is only available when the selected programme has not started yet.

Depending on the presetting the TV set will switch on by itself when it is in standby.

Delete memo

For programmes being memorised you can also delete the memo.

Timer list Call up timer list.

(Recording)

Schedule the recording of the selected programme for a time.

(Favourite)

Schedule the recording of the selected programme for a time. Additionally, an entry to the Home favourites will be added as soon as the recording starts.

OK Activate jump.

38

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV


Recording a programme via EPG

You can programme timer recordings of TV programmes conveniently using the EPG.

Adapting the EPG Overview

The options to be selected are in the header, if not, press MENU key .

Select the desired broadcast.

Select day or genre.


13

15

17:30 - 18:00

Unter uns

17:15 - 18:00

Brisant

Today DVB-C News

17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00

18:00 - 18:50

SOKO Wismar

19:25 - 20:15

Küstenwache

19:40 - 20:15 18:00 - 18:30 18:30 18:45 19:05 - 19:40

Alles was zählt

18:00 - 18:50

Verbotene Liebe

18:50 - 19:45

17:29 - 17:59

16:55 - 17:55 taff

17:00 - 18:00


17:58 - 18:29

Die Simpsons

18:29 - 18:58

Die Simpsons

18:58 - 20:14

Galileo

18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00

13

15

17:30 - 18:00

Unter uns

17:15 - 18:00

Brisant

Today DVB-C News

17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00

18:00 - 18:50

SOKO Wismar

19:25 - 20:15

Küstenwache

19:40 - 20:15 18:00 - 18:30 18:30 18:45 19:05 - 19:40

Alles was zählt

18:00 - 18:50

Verbotene Liebe

18:50 - 19:45

17:29 - 17:59 17:59 - 18:31 18:31 - 19:15 19:15 - 19:59 push - das SAT.1 Magazin

16:55 - 17:55 taff

17:00 - 18:00

17:58 - 18:29

Die Simpsons

18:29 - 18:58

Die Simpsons

18:58 - 20:14

Galileo

18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00

RECORD key: Programme timer recording for the TV programme.

Timer data dialogue is opened.

Timer data - Recording Back

Data part 1 Data part 2

Recorder

Programme

Folder

Station

Date

Beginning

End

Recording type

DR+

18:00 - 18:50 Verbotene Liebe

Main folder

Das Erste HD

27.01.2015

18:00

18:50

Once only Mon-Fri Daily Weekly Series

Example If you look for the next newscast select and genre. Newscasts will be highlighted.

Standard view: news under

Adapting the EPG view

PIP: Switch in EPG view between standard and compact view.

Record station

Check the timer data and update it if necessary (e.g. directory, start, end, recording type).

See chapter TV ,section setting options in the

Timer for explanations of the

Timer data menu.

13

15

17:30 - 18:00

Unter uns

17:15 - 18:00

Brisant

17:29 - 17:59

Today DVB-C News

17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00

18:00 - 18:50

SOKO Wismar

19:25 - 20:15

Küstenwache

18:00 - 18:30 18:30 18:45 19:05 - 19:40

Alles was zählt

18:00 - 18:50

Verbotene Liebe

17:59 - 18:31

18:50 - 19:45

18:31 - 19:15

19:40 - 20:15

19:15 - 19:59 push - das SAT.1 Magazin

16:55 - 17:55 taff

17:00 - 18:00

17:58 - 18:29

Die Simpsons

18:29 - 18:58

Die Simpsons

18:58 - 20:14

Galileo

18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00

Select Record station ,

OK adopt.

In the EPG a recording symbol is placed behind the title of the programme.

Compact view:

Memorising a programme via the EPG

A programme that has not started yet can be memorised. For memorised programmes, the TV set will ask at the beginning of a programme if it should change the channel accordingly or switch on from the stand-by mode if this is activated in the menu System settings p

Control p

EPG p

TV on when memorised .

Today DVB-C All genres

10 ZDF HD

11 ARD HD Brisant

17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00

SOKO Wismar Küstenwache

Verbotene Liebe

Unter uns Alles was zählt

13 VOX

14 Sat. 1

15 ProSieben mieten, kaufen, wohnen

16 kabel eins

17 SPORT1

18 RTL2

19 SIXX taff

Navy CIS

X-Diaries

Die Simpsons

Köln 50667

Emergency Room Private Practice

Die Simpsons Galileo push - das SAT.1 Magazin

Berlin - Tag & Nacht

Grey‘s Anatomy Top Dog Model

Mark the desired programme.

OK Call up detailed information.

Mark Memorise ,

OK Memorise programme.

In the EPG, a memorise symbol is placed behind the title of the programme .

After a software update, it is likely that Memos of programmes are deleted. After a software update, please check your timer list (see chapter TV , section

Timer ).

Configuring EPG

You can find the EPG settings in the chapter System settings ,section

Control – EPG ).

39

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Teletext

Teletext

Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP text and FLOF.

Up to 2000 pages are stored in order to get quick access.

Additional page selection possibilities

First possibility:

INFO: Call overview page 100.

Second possibility:

Directly enter the page number.

Starting and ending Teletext

TEXT: Call teletext.

The function of the TEXT key can be set under

System settings ט Control ט more ... ט HbbTV ט

Function of the TEXT key .

The factory default is Standard teletext first (see also chapter System settings , section Control –

HbbTV ).

Third possibility:

The page includes 3-digit page numbers.

Mark desired page number.

Das Erste

Das Erste

100 100 ARDtext Do 20.12.14 14:12:42

ARD Text

Syrien: Botschafter läuft über .. 107

EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf .... 121

Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet 112

Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück ..... 142

Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour. 666

Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop.. 211

NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki... 220

14:00 Tagesschau

14:10 ARD-Mittagsmagazin .....

15:00 Tagesschau

312

Tagesschau.... 101 Kultur........ 400

Wirtschaft.... 170 Wissen........ 500

Sport..... 200/600 Ratgeber...... 530

Programm...... 300 Inhalt (A-Z).. 790

– + Wirtschaft Nachrichten

Back

100 100 ARDtext Do 20.12.14 14:12:42

ARD Text

Syrien: Botschafter läuft über .. 107

EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf .... 121

Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet 112

Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück ..... 142

Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour. 666

Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop.. 211

NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki... 220

14:00 Tagesschau

14:10 ARD-Mittagsmagazin .....

15:00 Tagesschau

312

Tagesschau.... 101 Kultur........ 400

Wirtschaft.... 170 Wissen........ 500

Sport..... 200/600 Ratgeber...... 530

Programm...... 300 Inhalt (A-Z).. 790

– + Wirtschaft Nachrichten

OK Call page.

TEXT: Switching between Standard Teletext and

MediaText.

Pressing the BACK key ends Teletext.

Key functions for Standard Teletext operation

INFO press longer: Show Explanation of keys.

IINFO or BACK: Hide Explanation of keys.

Back

Fourth possibility:

The page consists of several sub-pages, indicated by the symbol and the arrows in the bottom line.

Go to bottom line.

Mark or ,

OK select previous / next sub-page.

The number of the current sub-page is shown between the arrows.

0-9:

0 AV:

9:

Directly enter the page number.

Stop self changing pages.

Zoom in the page (press several times).

Page selection with the coloured keys

Red key: One page back or back to previous page

(depending on Teletext provider).

Green key: Advance one page.

Yellow key: To next topic.

Blue key: To next range of topics.

The coloured bars (with TOP text) or the coloured writing (with FLOF text) in the last to bottom line show you which colour button you need to use to select which topic areas and topics.

Page selection with P+/P–

Explanation of the symbols in the Teletext bottom line

Symbol

(icon)

Remote control key

–

Description

For Teletext pages with sub-pages:

Show previous sub-page.

– For Teletext pages with sub-pages:

Show next sub-page.

Hide TV picture (Teletext as full screen).

–

–

–

Insert TV picture (Split screen Teletext/

TV Picture).

Activate Newsflash mode.

Show hidden information on the Teletext page.

Hide information on the Teletext page again.

P+

P– call next Teletext page.

call previous Teletext page.

Add current Teletext page to the favourites in Home view.

Call function list with Teletext settings.

40

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Teletext / Rotating the TV set

Newsflash

Some text pages, e.g., live tickers, will be permanently updated. In order to keep track of changes and also to be able to watch the TV programme at the same time you may hide the Teletext temporarily and can still remain informed on updates of the page.

Rotating the TV set

By using a connected motorized stand you have the possibility to rotate your TV set by means of the remote control.

The range of rotation and the switch-off position you can set under

System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט Rotate TV . For more information, see chapter System Settings , section Control –

Rotate TV .

Mark Newsflash ,

OK confirm.

The future behaviour of the News function depends on the type of the Teletext page:

In case of Full screen Teletext pages the Teletext will be hidden. In the bottom right corner, there will be a symbol for the activated news function.

Rotating the TV set


Rotate TV set to the desired position.

Or:


Select Rotate TV ,

OK call.

1

Rotate TV

Rotate TV

Rotation angle -40° -11°

Back

+40°

A screen message appears when the contents of the page has changed.

The Teletext page has been updated. Would you like to see it now?

yes no

Rotate TV set to the desired position.

The TV set may be positioned within the set range of rotation.

BACK: exit Rotate TV.

Show updated page,

Select yes or no .


In case of Teletext pages which cover only a part of the

Teletext page, e.g., News tickers, the respective part will be faded in and permanently updated.

End News function

OK show Teletext again.

Or:

BACK: exit Teletext.

41

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

HbbTV / MediaText

HbbTV / MediaText

HbbTV (1 (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user comprehensive multimedia contents, e.g., media centres or additional information on the current programme as far as they are provided by the station (Value-added service).

MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext for HbbTV.

MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an

HbbTV application.

The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.

A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or equivalent) is recommended for smooth playback of videos.

Opening HbbTV text directly

Depending on the programme provider, the direct

Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText must then be opened by means of the HbbTV application.

MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected channel.

Connection to the Internet established.

TEXT: Call up “standard” Teletext (see chapter TV , section Teletext ).

By pressing the TEXT key a second time the Media-

Text/HbbTV Text will be called up.

The function of the TEXT key can be set.

Opening an HbbTV application

If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after changing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start process and a red key symbol will appear. When starting manually, the application will be loaded not until you press the red key.

The start behaviour can be set under System settings

ט

Control

ט more ...

ט

HbbTV

ט

Function of the TEXT key (see also chapter

System settings , section Control – HbbTV ).

HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.

Connection to the Internet established.

HbbTV mode is set to on .

Red key: Load / display HbbTV application.

Navigation within the HbbTV Text and how the coloured keys are assigned can vary depending on the provider.

Terminating the HbbTV Text

Pressing the BACK key ends HbbTV text.

The appearance, key assignment and available functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on the provider.

Under certain circumstances, the recording and bookmarking functions of the applications may not be supported.

Loewe do not guarantee the accessibility, functionality or content of HbbTV applications.

Hide / Close HbbTV application

BACK: Hide / Close HbbTV application.

Depending on the set start behaviour, the HbbTV application will be hidden (automatically) or closed

(manually). In the start behaviour Automatic , you need to press the BACK key a second time for closure.

You will see a screen message after closing.

HbbTV services for DVB radio

Various DVB radio stations also offer HbbTV text/media text. The functionality is the same as in TV mode.

(1 Depending on the settings selected.

42

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

PIP

Picture in Picture (PIP)

The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture in Picture.

Selecting the station of the PIP picture

If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green, press the green key .

Select the station as usual. (see also chapter TV , section Select station ).

Starting and ending PIP mode

PIP: Show/hide PIP display.

Simultaneous display of...

a digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S) and picture from an AV source (e.g., AV, HDMI1) z (yes) / – (no) z a channel via digital satellite (DVB-S) and a channel via analogue cable television a digitally broadcast channel DVB-T/C and a channel over analogue cable television a digitally broadcast channel over DVB-T/C and a satellite broadcaster (DVB-S) z z z two channels over analogue cable television two digitally broadcast channels (DVB-T/C/S) a free-to-air and an encrypted digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S) two encrypted channels an SDTV channel and an HDTV channel (DVB-

C/S) two HDTV channels (DVB-C/S)

– z z z z z

Picture change and station selection are restricted during recording.

Select the station for the main picture

If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not white, press the green key .

Select the station as usual. (see also chapter section Select station

Coloured key functions

).


Yellow key: Swaps contents of TV picture and PIP

Blue key: picture.

Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.

TV ,

PIP Settings

The size of the PIP display can be set in the System settings under

Control

ט more ...

ט

PIP (see also chapter System settings , section

Control – PIP ).

The functions and settings can be executed and done via the PIP menu as well.


MENU: Call menu.

Select function,

OK call.

43

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

TV viewing with time shift

You can record programmes on the integrated hard disk of your TV set with the digital recorder of your Loewe TV set.

The TV broadcast that you watch is automatically recorded in the background. You can stop the TV programme at any time and continue watching it later with a time shift. The maximum time shift is three hours.

During timeshift operation, the programme is not stored permanently.

If you would like to save programmes for a longer time, use the archive recording (see next page).

Recording of analogue stations is not possible.

Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent for programmes of stations working with CI Plus encryption.

Returning to live picture (end timeshift television)

Press STOP key.

You see the station’s live picture again.

Switch to a different station

If you switch the channel, the time-delayed recording (time shift) is restarted. The current time-delayed recording is discarded (time shift buffer is emptied).

When switching between encrypted and unencrypted contents of the same station the timeshift buffer is also cleared.

When doing this, the timeshift television is interrupted and you see the live picture of the broadcast.

As a precaution, start archive recording of interesting broadcasts when watching stations with changing coding.

Interrupt watching (start timeshift television)

Press PAUSE key.

2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee

20:47

Back

20.12.2014

Digital 2

Setting bookmarks

You can manually set bookmarks during time-shift TV watching. For this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive recording.

Time shift

07:03 min

20:10 20:40 21:10

The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR+ status display appears.

At the top you will see the number and name of the station, start, end and the title of the current programme.

In the lower part of the screen at the beginning of the time bar you find the starting time of the background recording. On the right hand side of the bar you can see the time at which the time shift recorder will be full (automatically extends by 30 minutes, up to a max. 3 hours).

The time above the bar at the PAUSE key shows the current time.

Continue (time shift viewing)

Press PLAY key.


20:47

Back

20.12.2014

Digital 2

Time shift

07:03 min

20:10 20:40 21:10

You can now continue watching the TV programme at the time when you had pressed the PAUSE key .

The Playback symbol appears instead of the Pause symbol .

For further options of time-shift watching see chapter

Video , section Video playback .

44

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

Archive recording

Programmes that you wish to watch at a later date can be recorded in the Digital Recorder Archive (DR+ archive).

A recording can be made manually (instant recording / direct recording) or as timer recording. The timer data can again be entered manually or more comfortably, for example, via EPG.

If EPG or teletext data is available, the Digital Recorder stores the title and additional information on each programme in the archive.

If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast, these will also be recorded. DVB subtitles can also be recorded.

You can watch another programme or playback a recorded TV programme from the archive while recording a TV programme into the archive. But you can also play back the programme that you are just recording with time-shift.

With multi recording two programmes can be recorded simultaneously

(see chapter TV , secion Digital Recorder – Multi recording ).

During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress is red.


Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1

HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.

In order to use the full DR+ functionality, two antenna cables must be connected when using DVB-S.

Viewing another programme from the archive during archive recording

After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme you have already recorded.

Open the DR+ archive.

Mark the recorded programme,

OK view programme.

The recording process is continued in the background.

Time shift viewing during archive recording

Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can play back the programme that is being recorded or watch a programme on another channel using time delay.

PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.

The recording is continued in the background.

Display during time-shift viewing and archive recording:


21:09

Back

20.12.2014

Digital 2

Instant recording (One touch recording) / Direct recording

With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the press of a button. For direct recording, the recording will start only after entering the recording duration.

If the broadcast was watched right from its start, it will be saved from the the beginning in the DR+ archive. Otherwise, recording begins at the point from which viewing of the broadcast began.

One Touch Recording

Press REC key longer: The current programme is recorded immediately.

Time shift 20:15 21:04 21:50

05:00 min

1 Das Erste

PLAY key: Continue playback.

You will now see the time-shift archive recording.

For further options of time-shift watching see chapter

Video , section Video playback .

Direct recording:

Press REC key briefly.

Select recording duration,

OK confirm.

If desired, adjust timer data (e.g. directory, start, end, recording type).

Select Record station ,

OK adopt.

STOP key: End time shift and return to the live picture of the current archive recording.

Subsequent archive recording

You can also save an already viewed and finished broadcast in the archive provided there has been no change of station in between.

Skip or wind back to the desired broadcast and start the recording.

Watching other stations during archive recording

After you have started the recording, you can switch to another station.

The second channel can be watched in time-shift TV whilst a recording is taking place (Time shift during archive recording).

Setting bookmarks during archive recording

During a running archive recording you can create bookmarks (by pressing the PLAY key a little longer). You will see a message on the screen.

Bookmarks also serve as starting and end points of intervals.

45

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

Subtitles

Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording.

The recording of subtitles in DR+ continuous mode must be activated in the settings.

Calling up the subtitles during a later playback is similar to calling subtitles in TV mode.

Timer-controlled recording

Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the

EPG. The timer overview has room for 50 entries.

You will find further information on timer-recording in chapter TV , section Timer .

Switching off the TV set during recording

You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording is continued in the standby mode.

Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull the plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will be lost!

Stop recording early

You can end a current archive recording prematurely.

Press STOP key .

A message appears in the right upper corner of the screen.

Multi recording

The Multi Recording function makes it possible to record two programmes at the same time and still watch a third one as well.

Generally speaking: each recording, each selected station requires one transponder stream. With dual channel devices, two separate streams are available.

An ideal scenario is to record from two stations sharing one transponder, so that any third programme can be watched.

While simultaneously recording from two programmes that are on two different transponders, only those stations are selectable for the third programme, which are transmitted by one of the two transponders.

All stations that are on other transponders appear in the channel list in dark grey and cannot be selected.

In order to use the full functionality of multi recording, two antenna cables must be connected when using DVB-S.


Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1

HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.

The examples shown in the following table for station combinations are valid only for DVB-S. For DVB-T or DVB-C, other combinations may apply.

The station / recording combination that can be used, depends on the respective station group / transponder group. You get the assignment from your network provider or the respective broadcasting stations.

Examples of DVB-S recording combinations:

OK Stop recording.

The recording process is ended. The portion of the TV broadcast recorded up to this point is saved on the hard disk and can be played back via the DR+ archive.

If two archive recordings are active (multi recording), the recording stops that started first.

You can also end a running recording by deleting the corresponding Timer entry in the Timer overview

(see chapter TV , section Timer ).

Broadcasting station combinations:

Recording Sat 1

Recording Pro 7

Watching any of the stations

Recording Sat 1

Recording RTL

Watching any of the stations

Possible: Info

Yes

No

Yes

Transponder 1: Sat 1, Pro 7

Transponder 2: vacant for selecting any station

Transponder 1: Sat 1

Transponder 2: RTL

You can not choose any station, only one station on one of the transponders used e.g. Vox,

Pro7, RTL2.

Transponder 1: ARD, arte HD

Transponder 2: ZDF HD

Recording ARD HD

Recording ZDF HD

Watching arte HD

Recording RTL

Recording RTL II

Watching ARD HD

Recording RTL

Watching ARD HD

Watching ZDF HD

Yes

No

Transponder 1: RTL, RTL2

Transponder 2: ARD HD

Transponder 1: RTL

Transponder 2: ARD HD

ZDF HD is on a different transponder, and therefore can not be displayed.

46

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

DR+ archive

With the DR+ archive you have access to all the recorded programmes and and you can start their playback. In the DR+ archive you can create your own directories and sort your records accordingly.

DR+ archive function list

The function list of the DR+ archive contains the individual function for its archive entries.

The menu items available in the function list depend on the selected entry from archive (programme or directory).

Open the DR+ archive

Open the DR+ archive .

Select the desired DR+ archive if several available,

OK Display archive entries

The bar above the selected DR+ archive shows used space on the storage medium or the still available residual capacity. Below you will find the page number (e.g. 1/4) of the entries in the DR+ archive.


...

An archive entry has been selected.

Detailed info

DR+

1/4

Unsere Tierwelt

20:15 - 22:00

20.12.14 ZDF HD

Dokumentation, D 2014

Select desired function,


PIP: switch in DR+ archive view between standard and compact view. Directories in the default view are displayed by superimposed preview images and in the compact view, by an arrow -> in front of the directory name.

The bar above the preview image or the programme name shows you how far the recording has been watched.

DR+

1/1

-> Reisedokumentationen

The Big Bang Theory

22:30 - 22:55

03.02.15 ProSieben

Die Geschenk-Hypothese,

Sitcom, USA 2007

Playing from the DR+ archive

Select the required archive entry (programme or directory).

If directory selected:

Open directory,

Select the desired broadcast in the directory,

OK programme.

See chapter Video , section Video playback for further information.

During playback:

P+ call next programme.

P– call previous programme.

Directories are skipped in this case.

Detailed info Show detailed information on the marked archive entry (see next page).

Sorting Sort archive entries according to certain criteria (e.g. ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) or according to recording date (newest entries first).

Rename Changing title of the record or of directory.

Multi select Marking multiple archive entries is possible (see next page).

Delete Delete archive entry from hard disk and recover disk space.

Export Copy/move archive entries to an externally connected

USB storage device or to the hard disk of compatible

Loewe TV sets in the home network.

If no target medium is available, the menu item is shown in dark grey.

Move Here, you can move recordings in the DR+ archive to a directory and create new directories (see chapter

TV , section Digital Recorder – Moving of archive entries ).

Favourite Add archive entry to Home favourites.

See chapter Home view for further information.

Delete protection

Activate or deactivate protection against automatic deletion by the Delete Manager.

Symbol for activated delete protection:

Parental lock

Protect recorded broadcast by a four digit PIN against unauthorised playback.

Symbol for the set parental lock:

This menu item appears only when a PIN has already been defined (see chapter System settings , section Control – Parental lock ).

Repeat Playing archive entry repeatedly (in a loop) during future playbacks.

Symbol for set repeat function:

47

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

Displaying detailed information on the recording

If detailed information exists on the recorded broadcast from the EPG, you can deplay it.

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.


Mark Detailed info ,

OK Display detailed information on the broadcast.

Multi select

Multiple selection allows to mark several archive entries and then perform a desired action via the function list (e.g. export, delete).

The DR+ archive is opened, multiple selection was called in the DR+ archive function list.

Select archive entry,

OK Confirm selection (archive entry becomes blue).

Repeat as often as desired.

Detailed info Back

Die mehrteilige Dokumentation "Unsere Tierwelt" liefert

Ihnen bisher nie gezeigte, unglaubliche Einblicke in die heimische Welt der Tiere.

DR+

1/4

Unsere Tierwelt

20:15 - 22:00

21.09.12 ZDF HD

Unsere Tierwelt

Das Erste HD

20:15 - 22:00

Unsere Tierwelt

Unsere Tierwelt

View

To the right of the preview image you can see a brief description of the programme content, if available.

Beneath the preview image is the progress bar that indicates how far the programme has already been been viewed.

Below the progress bar, information such as station name, time and date of broadcast, as well as title of the recorded programme are given.


Select desired function (e.g. delete),


The marked archive entries will be deleted.

Deleting recordings from the archive


Changing the title of an archive recording or folder

Desired entry (programme or folder) is highlighted in the DR+ archive.


Mark Rename ,

OK Call.

Rename

Rename Back

Unsere Tierwelt|

Q

A

W

S

Y

1

Space

X

2

E

D

C

3

Delete

V

4

R

F

T

G

Z

H

B

5

N

6

Cancel

M

7

U

J

I

K

O

L

.-/

8 abc

9 0

Adopt

P

³

STOP key : Call delete dialogue.

OK Confirm deletion.

The DR+ archive will be displayed again.

Or:


Mark Delete ,

OK call.

OK Confirm deletion.

The DR+ archive will be displayed again.

...

DR+

3/9

Blumen der Welt (10)

19:00 - 19:45

19.09.12 Das Erste HD

Blumen der Welt (10)

Select characters,

OK Move character to input line.

For further information on character input see chapter

General information on menu operation .

End input with Adopt . This saves the change permanently.

Or:

BACK: Cancel renaming.

It may take some time to delete recordings from external hard disks, depending on the length of the programme and recording quality.

To delete a folder, all archive entries in the folder need to be deleted.

48

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

Export of archive entries

You can copy/move archive entries to an externally connected USB storage device or to the hard disk of compatible Loewe TV sets in the home network.

If no target medium is available, the menu item is shown in dark grey.

Copying/moving recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encrypted station, is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.


Moving of archive entries (folder management)

In the DR+ archive, you can create new directories when using the function move .

Into these directories you can move existing archive entries or do a new recording directly there.

For this purpose you simply choose the desired directory in the recording control (timer data).

You can determine the name of the new directory yourself. The DR+ archive root directory has the fixed designation main directory .

It is not possible to nest several directories into one another.

With multiple selection it is possible to move several archive entries simultaneously to a folder.


OK

Mark

call.

Export ,

Moving an archive entry to a new folder


...

Export

Timer data

Target

Programme

EXTHDD USB2

20.09.12 ZDF HD Unsere Tierwelt

Back


Mark Move ,

OK call.

...

Move

Move

Target

Programme

Reisedokumentationen

20.09.12 ZDF HD Unsere Tierwelt

Back

Select Target if several are available,

OK adopt.

Select Copy or Move .

OK Start the procedure.

After a successful moving, the recording is automatically deleted from the source.

Copying to an external hard disk takes place in the background and at a significantly higher speed. You see a screen message, when copying has finished.

The status of copying assignments in progress/ pending can be seen in the timer list.

The TV set must not be switched off with the mains switch during the copying process!

Select New folder ,

OK call.

The on-screen keyboard will be displayed to enter the folder names.

Select character,

OK Move character to input line.

For further information on character input see chapter General information on menu operation .

If the name of the folder is completely entered, complete with Adopt .

The new folder is created in the DR+ archive and the selected archive entry is moved into the folder.

Moving an archive entry into an existing folder

Archive entry to be moved to a folder is highlighted in the DR+ archive.


Mark Move ,

OK call.

Select Target (folder name) if several are available,

OK adopt.

Mark Execute ,

OK adopt.

The selected archive entry is moved to the selected folder.

49

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

Setting/cancelling delete protection

You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic deletion by the delete manager.



Mark Delete protection ,

OK Call.

Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)

You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for instance. Playback is then only possible after entering a PIN.

In order to activate the Parental lock, a code number (PIN) must have been defined beforehand

(see chapter System settings , section Control

– Parentol lock ).



...

Delete protection yes Adopt with

OK

Mark Parental lock ,

OK Call.

...

Parental lock yes Adopt with

OK

Mark yes / no ,

OK Adopt settings.

Delete manager

The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory space on the hard disk for new recordings.

If the capacity on the hard disk is nearly fully exhausted, the oldest recording(s) are automatically deleted in order to create space on the hard disc.

Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection are not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can still delete these recordings manually.

To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to an external USB hard disk (see Export of archive entries ).

Loewe are not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder’s hard disk.

OK

Select

Adopt.

Yes / No,

The titles of locked films in the DR+ archive will be replaced by asterisks * when a parental lock is active and thus cannot be read anymore. The detailed information for the recording cannot be called up.

The cover of the recording will be replaced by a picture of a lock. In addition, the entry will be labelled with the symbol .

Viewing a locked movie

The desired locked entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

...

DR+

1/4

When the access code of the parental lock has not been entered yet:

OK call entry of PIN.

Enter your PIN.

After the access code has been entered, the lock of the archive entries will be temporarily released.

OK View film.

50

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Digital Recorder

DR+ Streaming

Using the DR+ streaming function, you can view films via your home network from the DR archives of other Loewe TVs that have been set up for this function, as long as these units make their DR archives accessible.

Also, you can make the DR archive of your TV set available to any other

TV sets and UPnP clients equipped with this feature. They will then be able to access the archive via your home network.

To use DR+ streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets are required, of these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis

SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx as DR+ Streaming Server).

The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless connection via Wi-Fi or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).

Archive entries can only be provided or released in the network by

TV sets with integrated hard disks (DR+)

In case of these TV sets which are used as DR+ Streaming Servers, the DR+ archive must be made available for other TV sets:

System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes .

Archive entries released in the network can be replayed by all TV sets with chassis SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx and Chassis MB180.

In case of these TV sets used as DR+ Streaming Clients, access to other DR+ archives must be enabled:

System Settings

ט

Control

ט

more ...

ט

DR+

ט

DR+ Streaming

ט

Also use other archives

ט

yes .

Functions requiring write access to a device that enables the recording to be viewed are not available when viewing a DR+ archive entry over the network.

Such functions are, for example, child protection, delete protection, renaming, deleting entry or bookmark, setting bookmark, deleting or hiding parts of the recording.

Follow-Me function

The Follow me function enables you to interrupt a current programme in a TV set (main device) with integrated hard disk and to continue viewing it with a TV (secondary device) set from the point of interruption.

To use Follow-Me function, at least two Loewe TV sets are required, of these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis

SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx).

The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless connection via WLAN or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).

On the main TV set, the function must be enabled (1

ט

Share DR+ archive with other devices

ט

yes .

:

System settings

ט

Control

ט

more ...

ט

DR+

ט

DR+ Streaming

On the target TV set (secondary device), the function must be enabled:

System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Also use other archives ט yes .

Start Follow-Me function on main device

Press PAUSE key .


Time shift

00:03 min

20:10 20:40 21:10

20:40

Back

20.12.2014

Digital 2

Playback of DR+ archive entry via the network

The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR status display appears.

Activate Follow-Me .

Open the DR+ archive.

Select desired archive of the corresponding device,

OK Display archive entries.

Remote TV

1/1

Amazonas

19:15 - 20:15

20.12.14 ZDFinfo

Reise-Dokumentation, D 2014

You will see a message on the screen.

The archive recording starts in approximately 20 seconds without an entry. The TV set switches itself off after starting the recording. The broadcast is adopted into the DR archive.

The recording TV set will make the broadcast available to the network from now.

You can indicate the beginning of a Follow-Me recording at the target TV sets in your network by a screen display.

Select the required archive entry,

OK Play archive entry.

chapter , section Video playback for further information.

Continue viewing the programme at the second device

Call on the TV set, where you want to view the broadcast, the DR archive of the recording TV set.

Open the DR+ archive .

Select archive of the recording TV set (main device),

Display archive entries.

Select Follow-Me recording,

OK View recording.

(1 for device type with integrated hard disk.

51

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Multiroom

Multiroom

Using the Multiroom function (1 , you can transmit content over the network from a TV (Master TV) simultaneously to up to two other

Loewe TV sets, which are in different rooms.

The content may be live TV (Multiroom TV streaming), DVB radio

(Multiroom DVB radio streaming) or DR+ recordings (Multiroom DR+ streaming).

With the wake on WLAN/LAN function the master TV set can switch on the selected TV sets before the playback starts.

To use Multiroom TV, at least two devices with SL3xx chassis must exist. For the device type Reference, the multiroom function (1 is available ex factory; all other types of devices must be equipped with the feature upgrade stick SL3xx.

All TV sets must be connected to the home network. It is recommended to use a wired connection (LAN). In case of a wireless connection (WiFi), technical limitations (e.g. liability to interferences, bandwidth limitations) can cause disruptions in the playback right up to a complete breakdown of the playback.

To switch on the devices with the wake on WLAN/LAN function, the function must be enabled. Adjustable in the System settings under Multimedia / Network ט Network settings ט Wake on

LAN/WiFi .

Multiroom playback

Select your desired content, for example, a TV or DVB radio programme or a DR+ recording from the archive.

The TV set on which the content is selected, is for this time the Master

TV.

Example for Multiroom playback from the current TV programme:


...

9

Multi-room playback configuration

Here you can specify which TV sets should render the same contents as this set.

A maximum of 2 sets can be selected.

Back

Playback of ZDF HD

TV kitchen TV

TV study

Confirm

Mark/unmark with OK

Select device(s) on which the content is to be displayed (max. 2 devices)

OK confirm selection. Behind the selected devices, a check mark

۪

is set.

Select Confirm ,

OK confirm selection.

The current TV programme is simultaneously replayed on the selected (2 devices.

The Multiroom playback of a DR+ recording from the DR+ archive or a running DVB radio programme follows the same pattern as described for the above example of the Multiroom TV streaming.

In multiroom streaming, there are limitations in the playback controls, for example (pause and winding are not available).

Ending the Multiroom playback

If you select a different content on an individual Multiroom TV, the

Multiroom playback on this TV set is terminated

9 ZDF HD

20:15 - 21:45 Toskana


Recording

Sound mode

You can open the entire

station list in full screen mode here. It can be filtered in accordance with specific criteria.

Adapting the TV set names

The default name of your TV set in the network is Remote TV .

The device name can be set in the System Settings under Control

ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming ט DR+ device name .

PIP

Select Multiroom playback ,

OK call.

With Multiroom TV Streaming, only stations that transmit unencrypted TV content can be used.

Multiroom function with the Smart tv2move app

The selection of individual TV sets can be comfortably made with the Smart tv2move app and the Multiroom function (Multiroom TV

Streaming and Multiroom DR+ Streaming) can be initiated.

You can download the Loewe Smart tv2move app free of charge from the app store.

(1 The Multi-room Function is automatically activated for Reference devices from software version 2.1.x.

(2 Time delay of 100ms.

52

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Timer

Timer

In the timer menu you will find the Timer List and the Timer Services.

All programmed recordings, earmarked programmes and copy jobs are listed in the timer list.

The timer services menu offers you convenient alarm services see chapter TV , section Timer – Timer Services ).

New instruction: New recording

In the Timer list:

OK call.

Mark Create newly ,

Mark New recording ,

OK call.

The function list for recording will be opened.

Calling the timer menu


Select TV ,

OK call.

select Timer (at sources),

Or: press longer: call the timer menu.

9

Recording

Manual recording

Current programme

9 ZDF HD 20:15 - 21:45

Toskana

20:15

Following programme

9 ZDF HD 21:45 - 22:10 heute journal

Recording via EPG

Open DR+ Archive

Thereby you can record the programme currently being watched.

Select Timer list .

Timer

Timer list Timer Services

Mon 22.12.

22.12.

22.12.

Mon 23.12.

10:32 - 11:00

12:15 - 12:44

20:15 - 21:15

20:00 - 20:15

ProSieben

ProSieben

RTL Television

Das Erste HD

How I Met Your Mother

Malcolm mittendrin

Wer wird Millionär?

Tagesschau

Back

Mark the desired option,

proceed.

Add new All entries >

Add new You can also programme new recordings, earmark other programmes and copy pre-recorded programmes from the DR+ archive to an external USB hard disk by means of the timer list.

When you have programmed timer recordings, the TV set can only be switched off to the standby mode. Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise no timer recordings can be made.

When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update, check your timer list.

Manual recording

Programme the recording manually.

For further information see next side.

Current programme

Record currently watched TV programme.


Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data are available for the current station.

Following programme

Record following programme.


Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data are available for the current station.

Recording via EPG

Programme recording of a programme via the electronic programme guide (EPG).

For more information refer to chapter TV , section

EPG – Recording a programme via EPG .

Open DR+ archive

The DR+ archive is opened.

For more information refer to chapter TV , section

Digital-Recorder – DR+ Archive .

Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:

Recording

Recording in progress

Marked programme

Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)

Serial recording

53

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Timer

New recording – Manual recording (current station)

In the Timer list, New recording is selected.

Mark recording duration.

New copy job

You should copy recordings that you want to save permanently on an external USB hard disk.

Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encrypted station, is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.

The selection of a recording duration programmes always a recording of the currently viewed station.

For Any station and time see below.

New recording – Manual recording (other station)

Manual recording

OK

OK

Call

Call

Timer data

Mark

dialogue.

The selected recording duration is preset in the timer data. Check timer data and correct them, if required. In case of a previous selection of

??? Min, enter definitely the recording duration.

Mark Adopt to Timer.

OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.

Recording has been started.

has been selected (see above).

Any station and time

Station selection .

Mark desired station,

OK Adopt station in timer data.

,

Check timer data and correct them, if required.

In the Timer list:

OK call.

Mark Create newly ,

OK call.

Mark New copy ,

The DR+ archive will be called.

For further information for exporting archive entries refer to chapter TV , section

Export of archive entries .

Digital-Recorder –

Record conflict

Despite the possibility of multi recording, it can happen when programming a new recording that there will be an overlapping with already stored timer recordings. In this case, the recording conflict dialogue will open.

Here you can determine which of the recordings you want to be executed, and you must eventually specify which of the programmes shall be fully recorded and which are cut.

Select recording,

OK change status.

The symbol before the recording shows you what happens to the recording.

OK


Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.

If the status for each recording is ok:

OK call.

Mark store recordings ,

The timer data of the recordings will be adjusted accordingly.

New recording – Current programme

After calling the Current programme the timer data dialogue will be displayed. The current programme is preset in the timer data.

Explanation of the symbols in the conflict manager:

TV programme is completely recorded.


Recording is cut off (at the beginning and/or end). Pay attention to the start and end time of the recording.



Recording has been started.

The recording is deleted.

New recording – Following programme

After calling the Following programme the timer data dialogue will be displayed. The following programme of the current station is preset in the timer data.




54

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Timer

Delete/change programmed timer instruction

Use this function in the timer list if you want to delete recordings already programmed, to end a running timer recording or to change a timer instruction.

The Timer list is displayed.

Mark desired timer instruction,

The text of a currently active timer instruction is red. If you delete this timer instruction, the recording is stopped.

Timer

Timer list Timer Services

Mon 24.09.

24.09.

24.09.

Mon 25.09.

10:32 - 11:00

12:15 - 12:44

20:15 - 21:15

20:00 - 20:15

ProSieben

ProSieben

RTL Television

Das Erste HD

How I Met Your Mother

Malcolm mittendrin

Wer wird Millionär?

Tagesschau

Back

Entering the Timer data

After selecting the station you wish to record, timer data will be displayed.

The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the way

(EPG, manually) the recording has been programmed.

9 Current programme

101 Das Erste HD 20:15 - 21:45

Tatort: Jagdzeit

20:15

Timer data - Recording

Standard settings

Recorder DR+

Additional options

Programme

Folder

20:15 - 21:45 Tatort: Jagdzeit

Main folder

Station

Date

Beginning

End

Recording type

Das Erste HD

23.07.2014

20:15

21:45

Once only Mon-Fri Daily Weekly Serial

Back

Record station Detailed info

Add new All entries >

Update timer data, if required, or press

OK for confirmation.

Please also read the instructions in chapter System settings , section Extras – CA module concerning the recording of encoded programmes.

OK Change marked timer instruction.

The timer instruction will be displayed.

Or:

STOP: Delete marked timer instruction.

OK Confirm delete.

Timer instruction will be deleted.

Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –

Standard settings

Folder If available, select the directory into which the recording will be directly saved.

The DR+ archive root directory has the fixed designation Main folder .

Default setting: Main folder.

Station Station for which the recording is carried out.

Date Day of recording.

Beginning Starting time of the recording.

End End time of the recording.

Recording type

Programmes can be recorded in different ways:

Once only: The programme will be recorded at the specified time.

Mon-Fri: The programme will always be recorded from Monday to Friday at the specified time.

Daily: The programme will be recorded every day at the specified time.

Weekly: The programme will be recorded every week at the specified time.

Serial (1 : A programme running regularly, but with different start times, can be conveniently programmed.

In this case, the TV set is checking ervery day at the specified time, whether the programme is available in the EPG data. If so, the program is recorded, if not, the next review will be made the following day.

(1 only available if EPG data exists.

55

Reference 55-85

User manual

TV

Timer

Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –

Additional options

Lock recording

Only allow later playback of this recording after entering the PIN number (Parental lock).

If a PIN still has not been entered under System settings

ט

Control

ט

Parental lock , the

Parental lock will at first be activated. See chapter System settings , section Control –

Parental lock for further information.

Timer Services

This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.

If the TV set is switched on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the

OK key , the TV set switches automatically off again for safety reasons.

The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any key.

Delete protection

Safeguard the recording from being deleted automatically by using the delete manager.

Call Timer Services


Auto time control (1

Your TV set can use the automatic time control

(Accurate Recording) for recording a programme.

The automatic time control takes control of the corresponding monitoring of the start and end time for DVB stations. The recording is started at the beginning of the broadcast and switched off at the end, even if the start and/or end time have been changed by the programme provider.

The automatic time control is not supported by all stations.

If yes is selected and automatic time control is not supported by the recorded channel then no recording is made.

If the programme information (Event-ID) should not be available any more for the recording of a programmed broadcast. e.g., due to a programme change or because the Event-ID has been changed by the station, the programme cannot be recorded. The broadcasters alone are responsible for the transfer of this data for using automatic time control.

The availability of the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed by Loewe.

Select TV ,

OK call.

select Timer (at sources),

Or: press longer: call the timer menu.

Timer

Timer Iist Timer Services once yes, at ??:??

daily yes, at ??:??

alarm yes, at ??:??

Mon-Fri yes, at ??:??

Sat yes, at 15:??

Sun yes, at ??:??

TV Radio

Adopt with

OK

Select Timer Services .

Back

Recording subtitles

Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recorded too.

In case of a direct recording the presetting is taken from System settings

ט

Control

ט more

...

ט

DR+

ט

Recording subtitles .

Favourite When selecting yes the recording will be added to the Home favourites.

Select the desired setting,

OK change.

OK adopt.

Explanations of the setting options:

Switch off once

The set switches to the standby mode automatically at the specified time.

If a time is specified which has already passed on the same day, the set switches off at this time the next day.

Switch off daily

The set switches to the standby mode automatically every day at the specified time.

One time alarm

The set alerts you once today at the specified time.

If a time was specified which has already passed on the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.

Wake up

Mon-Fri

The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday at the set time.

Wake up Sat

Wake up Sun

The TV set alerts on Saturdays or Sundays regularly at the specified time.

Wake up with Indicate whether the TV set should enter the TV or radio mode from stand-by during an alarm. The station, which was last active, is activated.

(1 only available if EPG data exists.

56

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Video

The item Video gives you access to videos from local (USB, home network) and online sources.

High definition movie material (HD movies) from format 720p upwards (resolution 1280 x 720 or higher) should be played back via a wired connection. If there is a wireless connection, then technical limitations (e.g., fault liability, bandwidth limitations) can cause disruptions in the playback right up to a complete breakdown of the playback.

Video function list

The video function list contains the individual functions for your videos.

A video source has been selected.

The menu items available in the function list depend on the currently marked object (data source, directory, file).


Here you can sort entries according to specific criteria.

Calling video selection

Sorting

Favourite


Home

TV

Video

Audio/Radio

Photo

Web

Select Video .

Favorites

Tatort

Sources

Grey´s Anatomy

DR+

DR+ archive

Media01

Medianet

Media_NAS

Video_2.avi

0.68 GB

Video_3.avi

1.03 GB

Video_4.avi

0.04 GB

Video_5.avi

0.29 GB

Video_6.avi

0.19 GB

Video_7.avi

0.74 GB

Video 8 avi



System settings

Sorting Sort media files in the opened directory in alphabetical

(ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or date (newest entries first).

OK call.

Select favourite (if any) or source,

Favourite Add marked media file to the Favourites in Home view .

Possible video sources

The media sources shown here depend on the devices available/ used.

Select video

DR+ archive Programmes that you have recorded onto the integrated hard disk using the Digital Recorder are collected in the DR+ archive your recorded programmes.

.

Via the DR+ archive you can replay, edit or delete

For further information see chapter TV , section

Digital Recorder – DR+ archive .

MediaNet Call MediaNet .

For further information see chapter Web , section

MediaNet .

USB USB storage media on the USB connections of your

TV set.

The exact designation depends on the relevant storage medium.

Please also observe the notes regarding USB sticks in chapter Miscellaneous , section Software update !

TwonkyMedia

WMP11

Examples for media servers in your home network.

The exact designation depends on the media server used.

A video source has been selected.

The directory structure and the form of presentation of the title selection is dependent on the selected source.

Select desired directory,

OK open directory.

Repeat procedure if necessary.

USB1

Video_2.avi

0.68 GB

Video_3.avi

1.03 GB

Video_4.avi

0.04 GB

Video_5.avi

0.29 GB

Video_6.avi

0.19 GB

Video_7.avi

0.74 GB

Video 8 avi

Source: USB1

Title: Video_1.avi

Size: 0.47 GB

Select desired video,

OK Start or continue playback of the selected video.

See chapter Video , section Video playback for further information.

57

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Video playback

The description of the following functions applies to the playback of videos from the DR+ archive as well as for videos from USB storage media or from media servers in the home network.

For playback of DR+ archive entries you have additional playback and editing capabilities. The explanation of these functions you find in chapter Video , section Additional functions for DR+ archive playback .

Symbol

(icon)


–

Description

Video status display

The video status display provides you with further options for the current playback.

INFO: Show status display.

DR+ archive : ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

–

long

long

0:00 0:38 0:45 hh:mm

BACK: Hide the status display again.

Description of the symbols in the status display for video playback

The number of available symbols in the status display depends on the selected video and the video source (DR+ archive, USB, home network).

Symbol

(icon)


Description

Call list view (select video).

hh:mm

Set bookmark manually.

Only for playback from DR+ archive.

Delete bookmark manually.


The function is only available when a manually set bookmark is within five seconds around the current playback position.

Skip to next bookmark.


Skip to previous bookmark.


Call dialogue for deleting bookmarks.


–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Start DR+ Follow-Me recording.

The Follow-Me function enables you to interrupt a current programme and to continue viewing at an alternative TV set from the point of interruption.

Only in time-shift mode.

Call interval functions.


Only selectable in pause mode.

Adopt current freeze picture as cover for the DR+ archive.


Only selectable in pause mode.

Activate / deactivate again the repetition of the currently played archive entry.


Switch repetition (loop playback) of all titles of the current directory ON/OFF.

For playback of videos from USB storage media or from the home network.

Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop playback) of the current title.

For playback of videos from USB storage media or from the home network.

Change picture format of the video playback.

Skip to desired position in the playback.

Add currently played video to the favourites in Home view.

Call detailed info on the current playback.

INFO key : display of detailed info when status display appears, otherwise call of status display.

Call function list with video settings.

Explanation of keys

INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys continued on the next page

ט

58

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Pause playback (freeze picture)


DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna

0:00 0:38 0:45

Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Skipping with Smart jump

The Smart jump function ensures that the jump width is halved each time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a certain spot of the recording.

The settings for Smart jump you find in the System settings under

Control ט more ...

ט DR+ ט Smart jump .

DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2 hh:mm

0:00 0:36 0:45

PLAY key: Continue

Jump

By briefly pressing the or keys you can skip forwards and backwards in the movie.

The jump distance is adjustable in the System settings under

Control

ט more ...

ט

DR+

ט

Jump distance (see also chapter

System settings , section Control

ט

DR+ ).

Skip forwards.


0:00 0:40 0:45

Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2 hh:mm

You are looking for a particular scene in a running programme:

Depending on your needs, press the key (backwards) or (forwards) briefly several times, to roughly jump to the area of the programme you are looking for.

If you skipped the desired scene of the programme, jump in the opposite direction. This jump is executed in halfs of the jump distance.

If you skipped the desired scene of the programme again, jump again in the opposite direction. In the process, the jump distance is cut in half again.

By halving the jump distance again when changing direction you can gradually approach the desired location.

hh:mm

Skip backwards.


0:00 0:38 0:45

Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Jump by entering a time

You can jump to any position in the video by entering a time.

Show status bar.

mark hh:mm ( Jump to ...

).

DR+ Archiv: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2 hh:mm

0:00 0:22 0:45

00:22

Enter the desired time with the numerical keys .

OK Execute jump.

59

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Wind

To search for desired scenes in movies you can fast forward and rewind at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.

Repeat

Videos can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop. Depending on the source (DR+ archive, USB storage medium, media server in the network), single or all videos can be replayed in an endless loop.

or press a little bit longer.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Repeated playback of DR+ archive entries

INFO: Show status bar.

0:00 0:40 hh:mm

By each brief pressing of or the speed will increase until you switch back to the first speed.

The different winding speeds are represented by the symbols shown below.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Mark Repeat ,

OK confirm.

The current archive entry will be replayed repeatedly.

The repetition setting remains active for this archive entry even when the playback is finished.

To deactivate playback again:

OK

Mark

confirm.

Repeat off


,

Repeating videos from USB storage media or media servers

0:00 0:43 hh:mm

In case of time-shift viewing, playback is automatically activated when the end of the recording is reached.

You are then about 10 seconds behind the live picture or when rewinding at the beginning of the time shift recording.

In case of Fast forward of archive entries, playback will finish at the end of the recording. The DR+ archive is displayed again.

Mark Repeat title ,

OK Switch the repetition of the individual video ON/

OFF.

The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another video is replayed.

Or:

Mark Repeat all ,

OK Switch repetition of all titles of the current directory ON/OFF.

The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another directory in the overview is selected.

Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated simultaneously. Using one of the two functions deactivates the respective other one.


In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these are buffered in the memory. This can take a few seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and

Internet speed.

60

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Select language/sound

Videos, especially those recorded from TV broadcasts, can contain several sound tracks.

Select sound track/language:

Additional functions for DR+ archive playback

There are additional editing and playback functions for playback of recorded programmes from the DR+ archive.


OK

OK

Mark

Mark

Settings

Call settings.

,

Language/sound ,

call Language/Sound selection.

Language / sound stereo

Dolby Digital

2.0

You can select other movie languages and other sound

formats here.

mark desired sound or desired language,

OK select sound track.

Adopt with OK

Setting bookmarks

To retrieve interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks for the start/end of a programme.

In programmes sent in Dolby Digital 5.1 format, the commercials are detected and automatically bookmarked at the beginning and end of the advertising block.

In case of a running time-shift recording (timeshift television), this will be converted into an archive recording when a blank is set.

PLAY key (press longer): Set bookmark.

You will see a message on the screen. The status bar is then faded in and you will see the set bookmark above the bar for the playback.

Automatically set bookmarks are white. Manually set bookmarks are blue.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Changing the picture format

Function is not available for all videos.


0:00 0:38 0:45

Mark Change Picture format ,

OK set picture format.

You can choose between small or full image settings.

Small image setting shows the video close to the original resolution. The video status bar is permanently shown below the image.

The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the entire screen. The status bar can be set to visible or hidden.

Jumping to Bookmarks


Mark hh:mm next bookmark

OK Jump to next bookmark.

,


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

0:00 0:41 0:45 hh:mm

Mark previous bookmark ,

OK Jump to next bookmark.

Or:

Blue key : Skip to next bookmark.

Yellow key: Skip to previous bookmark.

61

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Deleting individual bookmarks

Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.


0:00 0:23 0:45 hh:mm

Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Press PLAY key for a little bit longer: Delete bookmark.

Interval functions

The intervals between manually or automatically set bookmarks

(intervals) can be faded out for future playbacks.

In addition to that, unwanted intervals at the beginning or end of your recorded broadcast can be deleted.

An archive entry is replayed.


Move to the desired interval in the recorded broadcast by skipping or winding.

PAUSE: Stop play.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Deleting the Bookmark during playback

You can delete your manually set bookmarks during the playback of the DR+ Archive entry.

Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are displayed in grey. Automatically set bookmarks cannot be deleted.


Mark Delete bookmark ,

OK call delete dialogue.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

0:00 0:38 0:45

Hide Cancel Delete to start Delete to end

Mark Interval functions

OK Call interval functions.


,

Back

11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

0:00 0:38 0:45

0:00 0:38 0:45


Delete all bookmarks Delete bookmark ← Delete bookmark → Cancel

Delete all bookmarks

All manually set bookmarks (blue) in the current recording are deleted.

Delete bookmark

←

The manually set bookmark to the left of the current position will be deleted.

Delete bookmark

→

The manually set bookmark to the right of the current position will be deleted.

Hiding intervals

The Interval functions are activated.

mark Hide ,

OK hide current interval.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2



0:00 0:40 0:45 hh:mm

This interval will be skipped when the archive entry is replayed in the future.

62

Reference 55-85

User manual

Video

Show hidden sections

A screen message will appear when a hidden section is skipped during replay of a DR+ archive entry.

In System settings ט Control ט more ...

ט DR+

ט Notify hidden sections ט yes must be selected.

When message appears on screen, select yes ,

OK confirm.

During future replays, the hidden section is displayed again.

Determine cover picture

The covers for the display of the entry in the DR+ archive can be freely determined by you during an archive replay:

Jump / wind to the desired position in the recording.

PAUSE key:

OK

Switch to freeze picture.

Mark

confirm.

Adopt as cover picture ,

Deleting part of the recording



Press PAUSE key at such a position from which the recording shall be deleted up to the beginning or to the end.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

You will see a message on the screen. The image will be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive in future.

PLAY key: Resume play.

Subtitles

When recording a programme, any existing subtitles can be recorded as well and displayed when playing back.


Subtitles were recorded too (see chapter TV , section

Timer – Entering the Timer data ).

0:00 0:38 0:45



Mark Settings ,

OK call settings.

Mark Subtitles ,

OK call up available subtitles.

Mark Interval functions

OK Call interval functions.

,

Mark Delete to start or Delete to end ,

OK confirm.

Mark Confirm delete

OK Delete part of recording.


11:27 20.12.2014

Digital 2

Subtitles off

German

Here you can display the programme subtitles, if they are provided.

Adopt with

OK

Mark the desired subtitles,

OK show/hide subtitles.

0:00 0:38 hh:mm

Deleting intervals

Defined intervals will be deleted when you delete the corresponding bookmark at the beginning or the end of the interval.

63

Reference 55-85

User manual

Audio/Radio

Audio/Radio

With item Audio/Radio you find music files from your USB storage media and media servers in the home network and you access DVB and Internet radio.

Calling Audio selection

Audio/Radio function list

The audio/radio function list contains the individual functions for your music titles.

An audio source has been selected.


HOME: Call the Home view.


Select Audio/Radio ,

Home

TV

Video

Audio/Radio

Photo

Web

Favorites

BR-KLASSIK

Back to Black

Sources

DVB radio

MediaNet

Internet radio

Media_NAS

Misty Miller

01 Little Thing Called Love

02 Dancing With The Devil

03 Remember

04 Evergreen Love

05 Bones

06 Hope

07 Wild Thing

08 Eve

09 Ollie

10 Home

11 Vampire

02:15

03:42

03:07

03:01

02:42

03:39

03:44

03:40

03:49

03:42

03:29

Sorting

Favourite

Born to die Media01 TwonkyMedia

System settings

OK call.

Select favourite (if any) or source, OK


Confirm selection.

Possible Audio/Radio sources





DVB radio The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.

For further information see chapter Audio/Radio , section Radio mode (DVB radio) .

Internet radio The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the

Internet.

For further information on Internet radio see chapter

Audio/Radio , section Radio mode (Internet radio) .

Select music title

An audio source has been selected.

The directory structure and the form of presentation of the title selection is dependent on the selected source.



MediaNet .

OK


open directory.


USB USB storage media which are connected to the USB of your TV set.



Misty Miller

01 Little Thing Called Love

02 Dancing With The Devil

03 Remember

04 Evergreen Love

05 Bones

06 Hope

07 Wild Thing

08 Eve

09 Ollie

10 Home

11 Vampire

02:15

03:42

03:07

03:01

02:42

03:39

03:44

03:40

03:49

03:42

03:29

TwonkyMedia

WMP11



Select desired music title,

OK Start or continue playback of the selected music title.

See chapter Audio , section Audio playback for further information.

64

Reference 55-85

User manual

Audio/Radio

Audio playback

Description of the symbols in the status display for audio playback

Snow Patrol / Eyes Open Back

Pause playback

PAUSE key: Stop current playback.



00:00 02:56 04:27


00:00 02:56 04:27

PLAY key: Continue

Symbol Remote control key

Description

Call list view (select music title / station).

–

–

–

Switch repetition (loop playback) of all titles of the current directory ON/OFF.

Only for playback of music titles via

USB / Home network.

Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop playback) of the current title.


USB / Home network.

Switch shuffle playback for the titles of the current directory ON/OFF.


USB / Home network.

Switch off the TV screen.

Add the current station / music title to the favourites in Home view.

Show EPG detailed info on the current broadcast.

Only for DVB radio.

Call detailed info on the played music titles.


USB / Home network.

Call function list with audio settings.

Wind

You can fast forward music titles at four different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.

Press a little bit longer.



00:00 02:56 04:27

With each brief pressing of the speed will increase until you switch back to the first speed.

Available speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.

Snow Patrol / Eyes Open


00:00 04:10

PLAY key: playback.

Back




65

Reference 55-85

User manual

Audio/Radio

Select another title / play current title from start

BACK: Call music selection.

Select music title as described in chapter Audio/

Radio , section Selecting music titles .

Or:

Press P+ or briefly:

Play next title of current album / directory.

Press P– or briefly:

Play current title from start.

Press P– or briefly again:

Play previous title of the current album / directory.

Or:

Go to line with music titles,

scroll in music titles.


Shuffle playback

The music titles of your current medium are replayed in random order.

OK

Mark Shuffle playback

Repeat and Shuffle (see left column) cannot be activated at the same time. Activating the shuffle playback deactivates repeat.

,

Switch shuffle playback of the titles in current album / directory ON/OFF.

Switching the screen ON/OFF

Green key: Switch screen OFF.

Or:



00:00 02:56 04:27


00:00 02:56 04:27

OK Start playback of the marked title.

Mark Screen off ,

OK Switch screen off.

Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the TV set.

Repeat

Music titles can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.

Switch on the screen with the remote control:

Press green key .

Mark Repeat title ,

OK Switch the repetition of the individual music title

ON/OFF.

The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another music title is replayed.

Switch on the screen on the TV set:

Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.

Or:

Mark Repeat all ,

OK Switch repetition of all music titles of the current directory ON/OFF.

The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another directory in the overview is selected.

Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated simultaneously. Using one of the two functions deactivates the respective other one.

Repeat and Shuffle (see right column) cannot be activated at the same time. Activating a repeat operation deactivates shuffle.

Ending playback

STOP key: End playback and return to music selection.

66

Reference 55-85

User manual

Audio/Radio

Radio mode (DVB radio)

The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.

The AUDIO key has been preset to radio mode in the factory.




Switching Radio mode on

AUDIO key on the remote control.

The last used radio mode (DVB or Internet) is called.

DVB radio function list


Or:

HOME:

OK call.

Calling the

Select

Home view.

Audio/Radio

Select DVB radio,

.

Or:


call function list.

Select function,

OK call.

See chapter TV , section Function list for further information.

For the first use of DVB-Radio the first station in the radio station list is called, otherwise the station last used.

HbbTV services for DVB radio

Various DVB radio stations also offer HbbTV text/media text. The functionality is the same as in TV mode. (see chapter TV , section

HbbTV / MediaText ).

2 ANTENNE BAYERN

Switching the screen on/off



Certain radio stations show instead of the above symbol, a station logo.


Press green key .

Station switching

The radio mode is switched on and a radio station has been selected (see above).


Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.

P+/P– Station up/down.

The number and the station name are displayed briefly. Also, the status display with time/date and programme-dependent symbols appears.

Exit radio mode

Press AUDIO key

TV key or

: TV mode is called.

Or:

Enter the station directly using the numerical keys .

Or:


OK call.

Select another operating mode,

Or:

OK call station list.

DVB-C

...

ASTRA1

19,2°E

2 ANTENNE BAYERN

3 Bayern 3

4 Bayern 1

5 Radio Eins

6 hr1

7 hr2

Select station,

OK call.

67

Reference 55-85

User manual

Audio/Radio

Radio mode (Internet radio)

The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the Internet.

The names of the directories and stations in the Internet radio mode are given by the provider vTuner. Changing the order of stations or renaming them is not possible here.

Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the Internet has been established.

Switching Radio mode on

AUDIO key on the remote control.

The last used radio mode (DVB or Internet) is called.

Or:


Artist Search (Search for artists)

By means of the search for artists, you can quickly and easily see all radio stations that just play music by this artist. The result list is sorted for now and most played .

Internet radio station list is opened.

Select search for artists,

OK on-screen keyboard is opened.

Enter name of the band or singer using the keyboard (see also chapter General information on the operation , section

Entering characters with on-screen keyboard ),

OK adopt, search is started.

Select Audio/Radio .

OK call.

Select Internet radio ,

You see the radio station list.

Internet radio

...

Artist Search New search

(Coldplay)

Antenne Bayern

Viva Vida (15:31)

Bayern 3

Clocks (15:31)

Madhouse Radio

Most

MagicStar

Most

Radio Gong

Most

Spreeradio

Most

Select station,

OK call.

Station search

You can search an Internet radio station directly by name using the menu item Station search. The procedure is similar to the Artist Search described above.

Mark desired directory,

OK open directory. Repeat procedure if necessary.

Select station,

OK call.

For further information on the control of the Internet radio see chapter Audio/Radio , section Audio playback .

Switching the screen on/off


Or:

Station switching

BACK: call station list.

Select stations as described above. Or:

P+/P– Scroll through the current Internet radio directory to look for stations. Or:

Keys 2-9: Input the first letter. The station list will jump to the first station of the corresponding letter.




OK Switch screen off.



Press green key .


Press R

Select Screen off , on the ring cursor on the TV set.

Internet radio function list


Select function,

OK call.

See chapter TV , section Function list for further information.

Exit radio mode

TV key : TV mode is called.

Or:


OK call.

Select another operating mode,

68

Reference 55-85

User manual

Photo

Photo

Via menu item Photo you can view photos from your local media and from online sources on your TV screen.

Calling Photo selection


Select Photo .

Photo function list

The photo function list contains the individual functions for your photos.

A photo source has been selected.

The directory structure and the form of presentation of the photo selection is dependent on the selected source (example of a menu image: source server home network).


Favourites Sources

Home

TV

Video

Audio/Radio

Photo

Web

System settings

CRW_0172b

CRW_0652b

CRW_0284b

CRW_0533b

CRW_0457b

Medianet

Media01

Media02

USB1

Media_NAS

OK call.


Possible photo sources



Picture_025

Picture_026

Picture_027

Picture_039

Picture_040

Picture_045

Picture_046

Picture_047

Pi t 048

Select station,

OK call.

Slide show

Sorting

Favourite

Photo



MediaNet .

Slide show Start slide show of the photos in the currently selected directory (see next page for further information).



USB USB storage media on the USB connections of your

TV set.




Photo Here you can do frequently used picture settings

(Slide show speed, Crossover, Automatic rotate).

Select photo

TwonkyMedia

WMP11



A photo source has been selected.

The directory structure and the form of presentation of the photo selection is dependent on the selected source (example of a menu image: USB source).


OK open directory.


Pictures

Source: USB1

Title: CRW_7266b

Date: 19.07.2013

Size: 4036 KB

Select desired photo,

OK View photo zoomed to full screen.

See next page for further information – Photo display .

69

Reference 55-85

User manual

Photo

Photo display

Description of the symbols in the status display for photos

USB1 -> CRW_7266b

Back

Full-screen mode

A photo is highlighted in the selection (list view).

OK View photo in full-screen mode.

USB1 -> CRW_7266b

Back

Show previous / next photo.

Symbol

(icon)


–

–

–

Description

Call list view (select photo).

Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left.

Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the right.

Rotating the photo

Fade in photo status.

Mark or .

OK Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left/right.

USB1 -> CRW_7266b

Back

short

short

Start slide show.

Pause current slide show.

Show previous photo.

Show next photo.

Add currently displayed photo to the favourites in Home view.

Call detailed info on the displayed photo.

Slide show

Call function list with photo settings.

PLAY key:

USB1 -> CRW_7268

Start slide show.

Back




PAUSE key: Pause slide show.

PLAY key: Continue paused slide show.

Photo in full-screen mode / exit slide show

STOP key: Full-screen mode / end slide show and return to photo selection.

70

Reference 55-85

User manual

Web

Web

Here you have access to multimedia content in the Internet (MediaNet) as well as a high-quality web browser.

MediaNet

Call MediaNet

To use the full functionality of MediaNet, the TV set must be connected to the Internet.

Calling the Web selection

WEB: Call MediaNet (1 .


Select Web .

or


Favorites Sources

Home

TV

Video

Audio/Radio

Photo

Web

System settings

Loewe channel

THE LIBERATION OF ART

LUMAS

YouTube

Deezer Aupeo

MediaNet Browser

Select Web .

OK call.

Select MediaNet ,

Home

Browse

Settings

Imprint

MediaNet - Home

New

OK call.


Recommendations

Possible Web sources

MediaNet Under the menu item MediaNet you will find a continually expanding platform for interactive TV applications from the Internet (see next column).

All applications are optimised for use on the TV.

Browser Call Web browser of the TV set.


Browser .

The upper portion of the MediaNet home screen contains new online content.

The lower portion of the MediaNet home screen contains Recommendations given by Loewe.

The given content may change from time to time without prior notice.

Select Home ,

OK go to the right to choose the online content.

Mark the desired online content,

OK Display/play content.

The navigation within the various applications depends on the provider.

Functions in the MediaNet home screen

Home Displays the MediaNet home screen with a choice of new online content and recommendations.

Browse Under Browse you can list and call the online content by subjects.

Settings In the Settings for MediaNet you can select countries, for example, to take advantage of various services.

Imprint Providing the legally required information on the parties responsible for the content.

Exit MediaNet

HOME: Call Home view and select another function.

(1 The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings , section Control – Web key function ).

71

Reference 55-85

User manual

Web

MediaNet – Browse

Under the item Browse , you browse the full range of applications by topic.

MediaNet-Browse is called.

Define application as favourite

Mark the desired application.

Back

All

Recommendations

Video

Photo

MediaNet - Browse

All

Service

Games

Entertainment

News

Add the marked application to the Home favourites.

The favourite is added to view Home of web favourites and queued at the end.

MediaNet – Settings

Here, you can find setting options for MediaNet.

MediaNet settings are called.

Back

Country Selection

Imprint

MediaNet - Country Selection

Select Countries to display various services

Filtering applications

Select the genre / topic,

OK call applications of the genre.

Austria

France

Italy

Netherland

UK

Denmark

Service

Games

Entertainment

News

Sport

Music

MediaNet - Browse

Games

OK


call.

Country

Selection

Select countries from which you want to get information on services (see below).

Imprint Providing the legally required information on the parties responsible for the content.

Select desired application,

OK open application

Change filter

Go to column with genres / topics.

Select another genre / topic,

OK call applications of the selected genre.

Country Selection

Mark country,

OK select / deselect country.

Various services (applications, etc.) from countries that are marked with a tick are offered in MediaNet .

Exit Browse

BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.

Or:

Go to column with genres / topics.

Select Back ,

OK return to the MediaNet home screen.

Exit Settings

BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.

Or:

Go to column with settings.

Select Back ,

OK return to the MediaNet home screen.

72

Reference 55-85

User manual

Web

Browser

You can access Internet sites directly using the integrated Opera browser. The web browser can also be used without an Internet connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web interface (e.g., router, home control, home network server).

Entering a URL (Internet address)

Browser status is displayed.

Mark the URL (Internet address) of the indicated Internet site,

OK Open address entry box.

Calling the Web browser


Enter/change internet address Back

Select Web ,

OK call.

Select Browser ,

Start page will be opened.

http://www.loewe.tv

q a y

1 www.

2

Space w s x c e d

3

.de

4

Delete v f r g t b h z n j u m i k

.-/ l o

ABC

P

I

5

.com

6

Cancel

7

.net

8

.

9

Adopt

0

/

Adopt Cancel

INFO: display browser status.

Explanation of the symbols in the browser status

Update the displayed Internet site.

Define current site as homepage .

100% Change zoom factor of the displayed site / browser.

Add displayed Web site as favourite to Home view .

Select required character,

OK Accept character.

In the event of letters with a triangular, additional letters are displayed when pressing the OK button longer (2 sec).

Å Delete character to the left of the cursor.

.-/ The selection switches to special characters.

abc Switch between upper/lower case.

Space Enter blank space.

Delete Delete all characters.

Cancel Cancel input. The entry box will be closed and the previous Internet site will be displayed again.

Accept Accept address and open new Internet site.

The characters may also be entered by the USB keyboard or the numerical keys of the remote control

(see left column).

Navigation on Web sites

P+/P– Scroll page vertically.

/ Scroll page horizontally.

Mark the link or text entry box with blue selection frame,

OK open link or confirm text input.

For the entry of text, press a numerical key (0-9) repeatedly as with a mobile phone until the desired character appears. The available letters are printed on the individual numerical keys.

Yellow key: Delete character.

BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.

Exit Browser

Web site is displayed. Browser status is hidden

HOME: Call Home view and select another function.

73

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

System settings

Under the menu item System settings in the Home menu you find all settings and adaptabilities of your TV set.

Calling System settings


OK call.

Select System settings ,

Picture

Sound

Station

Control

Multimedia

/ Network

Connections

Extras

Here you can adjust among other things: Contrast, colour,

brightness, picture adjustment, sharpness, picture format.

Or:

Press MENU key longer: call System settings.

Explanations of the setting options:

Picture Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture signal on your TV set.

Menu items Picture:

3D, Picture adjustment, Contrast, Brightness, Color intensity, Image+ Active, Picture format.

Menu items Picture ט more ...:

Colour temperature, Sharpness, Move picture up/ down, Auto dimming, Film quality improvement

(DMM), Digital Noise Control (DNC), Skin tone,

Deblocking filter.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Picture .

Sound Under this menu item you find the settings for sound playback.

Menu items Sound:

Sound mode, Sound adjustment, Loudness,

Surround Mode, Sound picture synchronisation,

Volume adjustment.

Menu items Sound

ט more ...:

Auto volume, AV output signal, Maximum volume,

Maximum switch on volume, Balance.

The available menu items may vary and depend on the connected audio component.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Sound .

Stations Move and delete TV and radio stations. In addition to that you can automatically and manually update the complete station list. Your stations can also be arranged and optionally sorted in personal lists.

Menu items Stations:

Automatic scan TV+Radio, Manuell scan (incl. antenna status), Station lists TV, Station lists Radio,

Update station list automatically, Transfer all station lists.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Stations .

Control In this menu you find settings for additional functions of your TV set like EPG, picture in picture (PIP), digital recorder (DR+) as well as interfunctional settings like time and date, parental lock or software update.

Menu items Control:

Language, Parental lock, EPG, Energy efficiency,

Quick start mode, Software.

Menu items Control

ט more ...:

On-screen displays, Time and date, DVB settings,

PIP, DR+, Standard Teletext, HbbTV, Rotate TV (1 ,

Hard disks, Export log file, WEB key function.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Control .

Multimedia /

Network

By means of the Multimedia / Network menu you configure your network adaptor and network access.

By means of the menu item renderer you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer) via app to render (play back) contents there.

Menu items Multimedia / Network:

Network settings, Multimedia settings, Renderer,

Mobile Recording, Bluetooth.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Multimedia / Network .

Connections Use this menu to configure the TV set for operation with external devices.

The sound component wizard leads you comfortably through the configuration of your used audio equipment such as speaker systems or HiFi/AV amplifiers.

For more information, refer to the instruction manuals of the equipment used.

Menu items Connections:

Sound components, Antenna DVB, AV connecting settings, Digital Link, Gaming mode.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Connections .

Extras Under this menu item you can display the features of your TV set, repeat the initial startup or reset the device to the factory settings.

Also, DR+ streaming can be enabled, by means of which the TV set provides the contents of the DR+ archive on the network.

Menu items Extras:

DR+ Streaming, Integrated features, Repeat initial installation, Reset to factory settings.

For more information refer to chapter System settings , section Extras .

(1 Menu item will only be displayed when a motorised stand is connected to the TV set.

74

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Picture

Picture

Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture signal on your TV set.

Calling picture settings

Explanations of the picture settings (continuation):

Colour temperature

Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder hue according to your personal taste.

Sharpness Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the best definition.


Mark System settings ,

OK call System settings.

Mark Picture ,

go to next column.

Picture If your desired display format has not been automatically

selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.

You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versavice versa.

Move picture up/down

In various picture formats, font or graphic insertions are not or only partially visible at the bottom or at the top.

You can move the picture up or down with the up/ down menu control keys to make the displays visible.

Menu item only available in the picture formats panorama or zoom.

3D

Picture adjustment

Contrast

Brightness

Colour inten

Image+

Active

Picture format more ...

Select desired picture function,

proceed to next column.

Explanations of the picture settings:

3D Do the settings for your TV set‘s 3D display (1 (see next page).

Picture adjustment

You can switch between several fixed picture adjustment modes and the personal picture values that you have set here.

See chapter System settings , section Picture –

Picture adjustment for further information.

Auto dimming

Two automatic dimming functions are available here which enable you to adapt the TV picture to the room brightness, improve the visual contrast and reduce the power consumption of your TV.

Depending on video (VBD+):

The background lighting is reduced depending on the current video content and the video signal is simultaneously amplified in order to get an improved contrast of your TV picture ( V ideo compensated

B acklight D imming – VBD).

Depending on the environment (OPC):

The contrast of your TV picture is automatically reduced vs. decreasing room brightness ( O ptical

P ower C ontrol – OPC).

Due to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical reasons, this function is deactivated when showing 3D content.

Auto format

(AMD)

When auto format is switched on, the TV set recognizes the picture format for Cinemascope or widescreen films and adjusts itself accordingly.

Film quality improvement

(DMM)

DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements and rolling text displays. This applies especially for movies.

Contrast The contrast setting depends on the brightness of the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher the contrast should be set.

The power consumption of the TV set depends directly on the value set here.

Brightness Set the brightness so that the black areas of the picture only just appear black.

Digital Noise

Control (DNC)

With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can eliminate or reduce picture noise.

Colour intensity

Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste.

The colours should appear natural.

You can pinpoint this by the colour of peoples‘ faces for example.

Skin tone Adjust the skin tone so that the most natural facial skin colour is achieved.

Gamma brightness correction

If image seems over- or underexposed, you can adjust it here accordingly.

Image+

Active

Image+ Active is a special picture improvement developed by LOEWE which provides a detailed and contrasting, sharper, natural and true colored picture which is rich in detail and contrast.

Deblocking filter

To minimise the visible interference to the picture caused by modern compression methods for images and image sequences (formation of small blocks), a so-called deblocking filter can be activated which counteracts this interference.

Picture format

Select the format so that the screen is used to the fullest possible extent without affecting the natural proportions.

See chapter System settings , section Picture

– Selecting the picture format for further information.

more ...

call with OK (see right-hand column).

PC IN display

For some PC image formats, horizontal as well as vertical position and the phase position of the image can be corrected.

For more information, see chapter System settings , section Picture – Selecting the picture format .

Menu item only available if there is a valid PC signal via the VGA adapter at the AV connection.

75

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Picture

3D function (1

You can use the 3D functionality of your TV set to display 3D material transmitted by a channel or from an external player that is connected.

You require a pair of Loewe Active Glasses 3D to be able to use the

3D functionality in its entirety (see chapter Accessories ). Please read the operating instructions included with the 3D glasses.

Picture format / 3D mode

If 3D contents are recognised by the TV device, the picture format cannot be subsequently changed. The picture format when in 3D operation is always 16:9 PC.

3D mode

For 3D content that is being played back from an external HDMI player, the 3D display format is normally recognised correctly when the factory setting 3D mode

ט

Automatic is selected. You may need to set the 3D mode manually to view 3D content from broadcasters.

Owing to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical reasons, Auto-dimming - Room and Auto-Dimming - Video

(VBD+) are deactivated when 3D contents is displayed.

If the TV set is operated with the remote control during a 3D playback, flicker effects can occur in the 3D glasses when doing this.

Instruction / Symbol

If 3D content is detected by the TV set, a corresponding message appears. The instruction text will disappear after the display time has elapsed.

The following images will be displayed in 3D mode.

For this part, put the 3D glasses on and then switch them on. Viewing

3D images for extended periods of time can tire out the eyes and/or cause feelings of dizziness.

Calling 3D mode




Mark Picture ,

go to next column.

Mark 3D ,

go to next column.

...

3D

3D

3D-Modus Automatic Side by side Top/bottom

Back

In the status display, 3D content is indicated by an icon.

125 ASTRA 3D

20:15 - 21:00 ASTRA 3D Demo

21:00 - 21:45 ASTRA 3D Demo

20:42 21.01.2013

Digital 2

With this you can select the correct display format, should this not be recognised automatically, or you can deactivate the 3D mode.

Select 3D mode.

Explanations concerning the 3D mode

Automatic If the TV is set to this setting (factory setting), then the TV set automatically switches over to the correct

3D mode, if this is possible and supported by the broadcaster.

Only change the setting if the 3D content is not displayed correctly.

side by side To display 3D content in side by side format. When viewing 3D content with this setting, two almost identical images are displayed next to each other and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you switch on the TV set.

top/bottom To display 3D content in top/bottom format. When viewing 3D content with this option, two almost identical images are displayed one above the other and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you switch on the TV set.

76

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Picture

Picture adjustment

By selecting one of the preset picture adjustment modes ( Home

Mode , Premium Mode , Cinema Mode or Shop Mode ), the picture settings for the respective currently active signal input group are set to predefined values.

You can use Personal Mode to specify individual settings for contrast, colour intensity, colour temperature, sharpness and digital noise suppression. Here you can enter your own specifications for each signal input group.

You find a listing of the various signal input groups in chapter Technical

Data , section Signal input groups .

Selecting the picture format

The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.




Mark Picture ,

go to next column.

Mark Picture format ,

go to next column.

Calling picture adjustment




Mark Picture ,

go to next column.

Mark Picture adjustment ,

go to next column.

...

Picture format

16:9 TV

16:9 PC

16:9 Zoom

4:3 TV

4:3 PC

4:3 Zoom

This 16:9 TV mode enables a proportionally correct display

of 16:9 pictures. You select this mode when the picture signal is not supplied by a PC (normal case).

...

Picture adjustment

Home Mode

Premium

Mode

Cinema

Mode

Shop Mode

Personal

Mode

The priority here is low energy consumption in home use.

In this case the TV switches off automitically for the sake of saving energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.

Select mode,

OK adopt selected mode.

When selecting one of the three preset picture adjustment modes you have to specify additionally if the mode shall be set only for the currently selected signal source, e.g., Only for HD Digital or for the entire TV .

OK

Select format,

adopt selected format.

Explanations of the picture formats for HD signals:

4:3 TV

16:9 TV

Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9 broadcasts. You select this mode when the signal is not supplied by a PC (normal case). A small part of the picture is truncated. This may be necessary to hide possible interference at the edge of the picture, which arises from the signal supplied.

4:3 PC

16:9 PC

Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9 broadcasts without loss of information.

You select this mode when the signal is supplied by a PC.

4:3 Zoom

16:9 Zoom

Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture magnification. Displayed text may get lost.

Explanations of the picture adjustment modes:

Home Mode The emphasis for the picture settings is here on low energy consumption for home use. In this case, the

TV set switches automatically off after 4 hours of unattended time.

Premium

Mode

The picture settings in Premium Mode are optimised for a brighter environment at the cost of higher energy consumption.

Cinema

Mode

The cinema mode is optimised for video and photo playback.

Shop Mode The picture settings in Shop Mode are adjusted to operation in the presentation room.

Personal

Mode

Here, you can recall your last personal picture settings.

Explanations of the picture formats for SD signals:

16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.

4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.

Panorama 1 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain visible.

Panorama 2 Format filling display (factory default) of 4:3 broadcasts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain visible.

Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture magnification. Displayed text may get lost.

PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied by the station which is detected automatically.

77

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Sound

Sound

Calling the sound settings

The selectable menu items depend on the selected station and the connected sound components.




Mark Sound ,

go to next column.

Sound

Sound adjustment

Souond pic-

Possible sound formats depend on the number of channels

available in the received audio signal. If more audio channels are supplied than the number of speakers available then you can create a pseudo mode by selecting the speaker number which is contained within brackets. If you select

“optimal” then the number of speaker used will automatically, if possible, match the number of audio channels received, this normally gives the best sound quality. If a sub woofer is connected it is always active unless you select mono mode i.e a single speaker.

more ...

Select sound function,


Explanations of the sound settings:

Sound mode Depending on the supplied audio signal of your TV programme or audio source (DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) you can select the speakers you want to listen here.

The subwoofer is always active if connected

(exception: listening mode is set to

܃

).

If more audio channels are supplied than the connected speakers are able to reproduce, the missing speakers can be added virtually (this case is represented respectively by brackets).

In the „optimal“ position, always the best quality sound is output with the ideal number of speakers for the currently played audio signal.

Optimum

܃

܃

܃

܃

܃

The momentarily reproduced audio signal is output with the ideal number of speakers.

Play centre sound or mono (left/right).

Play front sound (L/R stereo).

Play front and centre sound.

Play front and surround sound.

Play front, surround and centre sound.

HiFi/AV amplifier

Play via an external HiFi amplifier. Selection is only possible if an amplifier has been selected in the sound components wizard.

Explanations of the sound settings (continued):

Dolby PLII mode

H e re yo u ca n se l e c t /a d a p t p reset so u n d characteristics (movie, music, matrix) in case of

Dolby Pro Logic II coded broadcasts.

The movie mode is „movie focused“, that is, the centre sound is dominant, as we are used to it in a movie.

In music mode, you can set 3 parameters:

Width : center sound is mixed with left/right.

Change in dimension: rear and centre are mixed with left/right.

Panorama: distance between the speakers is increased artificially.

In matrix mode, the front speakers are „mirrored“ to the rear speakers. Front left is mixed with left rear, right front with right rear and the centre sound is distributed to all channels.

The menu item appears when a multi-channel system (speaker system) is connected and loudspeakers are simulated (e.g. DVB signal with

2.0 sound, listening mode to 5).

Sound adjustment

Here, you can adapt preset sound characteristics of the respective broadcast. Selectable are, e.g.,

Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music and Film soundtracks. For personal music and film sound you can do the settings for pitch and bass sound (high and low frequencies).

Loudness Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.

Surround modus

Here you can choose between different surround sound simulations (see next page).

Sound picture synchronisation

If the sound and picture are not precisely in sync, you may correct this here. Move the mark on the bar downwards, slowing down the sound compared with the picture. Move the mark upwards, speeding it up compared with the picture. Time adjustment of the sound occurs in steps of 10 ms in each case.

only available for DVB stations.

Volume adjustment

The volume can differ according to the individual stations. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in relation to other stations, adjust the volume.

When the menu is open, you can select the stations one after another with P+/P– and adjust every single station conveniently.

more ...

call with OK (see next page).

78

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Sound

Explanations of the sound settings (continued): more ...

Loudspeaker/

Headphone sound

For analogue stations:

Selection options for Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or

Sound 2 for bilingual programmes, separately for the loudspeakers and the headphones.

Auto volume The volume may vary when receiving stations with different standards, when switching from station to station or during commercials.

You can reduce these differences in volume by selecting auto volume on . For music and live broadcasts you get a better sound spectrum with auto volume off .

Maximum volume

You can limit the volume adjustment of the loudspeakers. This prevents selecting a volume which is too loud.

Maximum switch on volume

Set the sound level to be heard after switching on the

TV set with the mains switch or after a power failure.

When switching on the TV set in standby mode, the volume last used is retained unless it was above this switch-on level. Otherwise it is limited by this.

Balance Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is identical on the left and right.

Cinema Surround

Cinema Surround is a Virtualizer mode that offers the possibility to create an virtual surround sound by means of the built-in TV speakers.

Selecting the Surround mode

The choice is available for sound component - TV speakers. All other audio components do not support this mode.

Adjustable in the System settings under Connections

ט

Sound components .

The selection of surround modes is available when sound mode

܃ or ܃ is used.

Adjustable in the System settings under Sound ט Sound mode or in the current TV programme via the function list (see chapter

TV , section Function list ).




Select Sound ,

go to next column.

Select Surround Mode ,

OK call.

...

Surround

Mode

Cinema

Surround

Dolby

Virtual

“Cinema Surround” gives the front speakers additional

virtual room depth when playing in the listening modes (4) and (5).

Select the desired mode.

Explanation of the setting options:

Cinema

Surround

For the Cinema Surround mode an advanced

Virtualizer technology is used that is developed by

Loewe. This one improves speech intelligibility while simultaneously widening the 3D sound.

Default setting ex factory.

Dolby Virtual Dolby Virtual simulates the hearing impression of a 5.1 surround sound system via the built-in TV speakers.

79

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Stations

Under the item Stations you find all settings concerned with station search for TV and DVB radio as well as functions for creating and editing the various station lists.

Station management is not possible as long as a programmed timer recording is active.

If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered prior to automatic search

.

The procedure for radio stations or Station lists Radio is similar to that for TV stations or Station lists TV. Therefore, this procedure is described only for TV stations.

Call Stations menu




Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Stations In this mode you open a wizard which automatically

searches and saves all the TV and radio stations. Please follow the instructions in the dialogues below.

Station lists

TV

Station lists

Radio

Update station list auto



Explanations of setting possibilities in the Stations menu:

Automatic scan

TV+Radio

Here you start the wizard that searches and stores all TV and DVB radio stations (see chapter System settings , section Stations – Automatic scan

TV+Radio ).

Manual scan

(incl. antenna status)

Here, you can enter all the settings available for a

TV station (see chapter System settings , section

Stations – Manual Scan TV / Radio ).

Station lists

TV

Station lists

Radio

Here you can move and delete TV stations/ DVB radio stations in all lists.

You can put together your most frequently watched programmes in one or more lists of personal favourites (see chapter System settings , section

Stations – Station lists TV / Radio ).

Update station list automatically

If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated automatically, provided the parameter Allow is selected (see chapter System settings , section

Stations – Update station list automatically ).

Transfer all station lists

Here you can export or import all station lists of this

TV set (see chapter System settings , section

Stations – Transfer all station lists ).

80

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Automatic scan TV+Radio

For automatic scan TV+Radio, a search wizard will be started that searches for new stations which are not yet stored.

You have to repeat the initial installation and automatically search for new stations if you want to delete all the existing stations and automatically search for new ones.

Explanations of some search settings (continued):

DVB-T/C/S

Network selection

If several networks are available, you can decide which network you want to receive your channels from.

DVB-T/C/S

Settings

With the selection of set location the conventional settings will be preset. Only change these defaults if you are familiar with other parameters.



OK call System settings .

Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Mark Automatic scan TV+Radio , go to next column.

In the upper info text the current search settings will now be displayed:

SEARCH WIZARD - Check search settings

Your TV carries out the update of the station list (search for new stations; delete stations no longer broadcast) with the following settings:

Germany analogue

Change search settings Start search/update

End with

Scrambled stations: (DVB-T/C/S)

You can state whether scrambled stations are to be searched for in the search/update. If you select yes, coded stations will also be searched for. However, these stations can only be received in connection with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card.

Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to receive certain stations.

Search method: (DVB-T)

If you want to run the station search independently of the channel grid, select Frequency search for the search method.

Search method: (DVB-C)

If you select Frequency search here, a search is performed for all receivable stations. With Network search , only the stations which the networks supply are searched - either for all receivable networks or only for the particular network specified under

Network ID .

If you want to change these search settings:

Select Change search settings ,

OK wizard guides you through the search settings

(see column on the right).

If you agree with these settings:

Select Start search/update ,

OK start scan.

BACK: Cancel current search/update.

Explanations of some search settings:

Signal source Select cable (analogue), DVB-T, DVB-C or DVB-S depending on which signal source you want to search for new stations.

Use the Antenna wizard to call the configuration of the DVB-T and DVB-S antennas.

Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes the Change search settings dialogue to be quit.

You must call up the dialogue again after finishing the configuration.

Network ID: (DVB-C)

If you select none here, DVB signals of all current broadcasting networks are scanned automatically

(recommended for most cable networks).

If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID

(necessary in the cable networks of some countries), only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are searched for automatically. Your cable provider has the information you need.

Search method: (DVB-S)

If you select Frequency search here, a search is performed for all receivable stations. With Network search , from all receivable networks all the stations are searched which are supplied by these networks.

Accept Logical Channel Number: (DVB-T/C/S)

In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T/C/S) are transmitted with a preset channel number per station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).


Cable

(analogue)

TV/colour standard

With the selection of TV set location the conventional

TV standard/colour standard is the default.

It should only be changed if stations with other standards are to be searched.

81

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations

The number of new TV stations found is displayed after the automatic search / update has been completed.

Proceed. The number of new radio stations found is displayed.

Manual Scan TV / Radio

Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.

The manual search of radio stations is similar to that of TV stations.

Therefore, the manual search for radio station is not dealt with separately.

Call list of new TV stations found.

...

Newly found stations

All newly found TV stations which are marked with a are then saved. With the

OK button, you can set or remove the marking.

Note: The newly found stations which you have already deleted are not marked.

3sat HD ANDALUCÍA a.tv ANIMAX ARTE

Proceed with

Calling manual search




Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Mark Manual Scan TV ,

OK call Manual Scan.

...

Manual scan (incl. antenna status)

Signal source Cable DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S

Back

Select station.

OK Mark / unmark station.

Stores the marked TV stations.

The list of new radio stations found is displayed.

Channel E 01 S 01

Frequency 196.27 MHz

Name HD

Search

Select station.


Proceed.


Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer exist is displayed, if available.

The number of the memory location used is displayed in front of the station. Please select the stations you really want to delete.

...

Stations no longer found (TV)

The following stored TV stations were no longer found because they are not currently broadcasting a programme or no longer exist. All TV stations marked with a are subsequently deleted. The unmarked stations are retained.

You can set or remove the marking with the button.

Channel TV Press

Direct 3 iM1

Direct 4

Direct 5

GoTV

ATV+

BVN

Proceed with

Select the menu item Signal source to decide in which area you want to search for stations.

Depending on the selected source, various setting possibilities will be available.

On the next page, the settings for analogue cable and

DVB-T/C/S sources are described separately.

Status bar for manual search

Status bars are displayed for manual search, which show the reception quality of the individual stations during the station scan. The markers in all bars should preferably be in the green area.

Station name Das Erste HD

Level μ V

BER 0 E-7

Select station.


Proceed. The marked stations will be deleted. The list of radio stations no longer found is displayed.

Select station.


End search wizard.

C/N: (Carrier/Noise) The bar shows the signal-tonoise ratio. The value indicated in dB should be preferably high.

Level: The bar shows the receiving level of the station.

The value displayed in dBμV should be preferably high.

BER: (Bit Error Rate) The bar shows the bit error rate of the station. The value for BER should be as low as possible.

82

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Manual search for cable analogue (analogue cable reception):

Manual search is called.

Cable analogue has been selected as signal source.

...


Signal source Cable DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S

Back

Channel E 01 S 01


Name HD

Search

Manual DVB-T/C/S search:

Manual search is called.

...


Signal source Cable analog DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S


QAM modualtion 256

Symbol rate 6900

Netzwork Standard

Station name Das Erste HD

Level μ V

BER 0 E-7

Search


Back


OK

OK

Mark and adjust settings,

confirm as the case may be.

Mark Search,

start search.

If a station has been found:

Mark Store/Overwrite ,

OK store station.

Mark and adjust settings,

OK confirm as the case may be.

Mark Search,

OK start search.

When a DVB transponder has been found:

Found stations

...

Back

Explanations on the search settings for cable analogue:

Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the station.

TV standard If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to select for specific channels or AV equipment.

Colour standard

If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to select for specific channels or AV equipment.

Channel Direct input of channel.

Frequency Direct input of station frequency.

Range for entry: 044.75 MHz - 859.25 MHz.

Name Here, the name of the found station is displayed. You can change the name of the station.

Search Store/Overwrite

Mark/unmark with OK

Mark the station,

OK Station will be ticked with . If necessary, repeat for several stations.

Stations that already exist in the station overview will be displayed with their station number on the left.

Mark Store/Overwrite ,

OK Stations marked with will be stored.

Explanations of some search settings:

Signal source

(DVB-T/C/S)

Selection of range in which you want to search for the station.

Channel

(DVB-T)

Direct input of channel.

Satellite

(DVB-S)

Here you can select the satellite where the stations are to be searched for.

Band

(DVB-S)

Here you can select the frequency band in which shall be searched.

Setting ranges: horiz/low 10694 - 11906 MHz horiz/high 11544 - 12756 MHz vert/low 10694 - 11906 MHz vert/high 11544 - 12756 MHz

Frequency

(DVB-T/C/S)

DVB-T/C: Direct input of station frequency.

DVB-S: Direct input of LNC frequency

Symbol rate

(DVB-S)

Here you can specify the symbol rate

Range: 1000-45000

83

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Station lists TV / Radio

Under the menu item Station lists TV or Station lists Radio you can edit (delete block, move block, restore deleted stations, delete list) various lists, e.g., DVB-T , ASTRA LCN , DVB-C , etc. You can also create and edit new Personal lists .

The function of Station lists Radio is similar to that of Station lists

TV. Therefore, editing of Station lists Radio will not be dealt with separately.

Move block / Change order

Stations with LCN cannot be reordered. In this case, the function Move block is hidden.

Select Move block ,

move to list.

Select beginning of block,

OK mark beginning of block.

Change station list

If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered before changing stations.

Select end of block,

OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured blue).

Select insert position,

OK Confirm insert position.



OK call system settings.

Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Select Station lists TV ,

go to next column.

Mark desired station list, call list.

...

ASTRA LCN

DVB-T

DVB-C

New personal list

ASTRA LCN

Delete range Move range Restore stations Delete list

1 Das Erste HD

2 ZDF HD

3 RTL

4 SAT.1

5 ProSieben

6 VOX

7 kabel eins

8 arte HD

9 Super RTL

10 Das Erste

11 ZDF

12 arte

13 RTL HD

14 SAT.1 HD

15 ProSieben HD

16 VOX HD

17 kabel eins HD

18 Super RTL HD

Cancel process Execute move

Back

19 Z

20 Z

21 Z

22 S

23 R

24 P

25 H

26 S

27 N

Delete block

...

ASTRA LCN

DVB-T

DVB-C

New personal list

ASTRA LCN

Delete range Move range Restore stations Delete list

1 Das Erste HD

2 ZDF HD

3 RTL

4 SAT.1

5 ProSieben

6 VOX

7 kabel eins

8 arte HD

9 Super RTL

10 Das Erste

11 ZDF

12 arte

13 RTL HD

14 SAT.1 HD

15 ProSieben HD

16 VOX HD

17 kabel eins HD

18 Super RTL HD

Back

19 Z

20 Z

21 Z

22 S

23 R

24 P

25 H

26 S

27 N

Here you can move stations around in all the lists, delete stations and restore stations you have previously deleted. You can edit frequently-used stations in one or more personal lists.

Here, you can delete and move station blocks as well as restore deleted stations.

The following section describes how to proceed if you wish to Delete block , Move block , Restore stations and Delete list .

OK

OK

OK

Select select

Execute move

block will be moved, or

cancel move.


,

Cancel procedure

Restore stations

Select Restore stations ,

move to list.



,

mark end of block (selected stations are coloured blue).

Select Restore stations ,

OK stations will be added again to the station list, or

select Cancel procedure ,

OK cancel restore.

Select Delete Block ,

move to list.




OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured blue).

Select Execute delete ,

OK block will be deleted, or select Cancel procedure ,

OK cancel delete.

Delete list

OK

OK

Select Delete list

confirm delete list.

Confirm delete.

,

84

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Compose / edit Personal list

Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations. You can compose the personal lists to suit your convenience (e.g., topic lists). Other persons using this TV set can create their own personal lists. You can create up to six personal lists.

Adding stations to Personal list

The Personal list must be opened to add new stations to it.

Select Add/remove Stations in the function list.

How to add stations is described in the left column.

Creating and updating personal station lists is not possible as long as a programmed timer recording is active.

Create / edit New personal list




Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Mark Station lists TV ,

go to next column.

Mark New personal list ,

OK New personal list x will be created.

x stands for the number of the personal list.

The number depends on how many list were already created.

...

ASTRA1

19,2°E

Personal list 1

1 SAT.1

13 n-tv

14 ProSieben

Add station to personal list:

New personal list

2 ZDF HD 15 3sat HD

3 BR Nord HD

4 3sat HD

16 ARTE HD

17 EinsPlus

Delete station from personal list:

Mark and press to remove.

Select other station list / sorting in right-hand column with "right menu control button"

Use to save new list.

5 ZDF Neo HD 18 Eurosport

19 ZDF Neo HD

20 ZDF.kultur

Deleting stations from the Personal list

The Personal list must be opened to delete stations in it.

Move / reorder stations in the Personal list

The personal list must be opened to move stations in it.

OK activate.

go to personal list.

in the function list,

Mark the station to be deleted in the personal list,

OK activate. Function of the coloured keys in standard

PIP functionality.

BACK:

OK

OK

Select

Store and close station list.

Select

Add/remove Stations

Move stations activate.

in the function list,

Select station to be moved in the Personal list,

mark (station will be coloured red).

Select insert position (insert position will be marked with a red line),

OK Execute move. Proceed in the same way with additional stations.

BACK: Store and close station list.

Mark the station in the station list which is to be added to the personal list.

OK adds the station to the personal list.

The new station will be added at the end of the personal list. Proceed in the same way with additional stations.

Call up additional options.

Renaming the Personal list

The Personal list to be renamed must be opened.

Select Rename list in the function list,

OK activate.

Enter new name.

ASTRA LCN

DVB-T

DVB-C

Examples of station lists. Select the station list from which you add stations to the personal list. In the personal list you can store stations from different sources.

OK

Select Adopt .

New name for the personal list will be adopted.

Sorting The sorting procedure for the source station list may be changed between numerical and alphabetical.

BACK: Store and close station list.

Delete Personal list

The Personal list to be deleted must be opened.

Deleting of the list is irrevocable.

Select Delete list in the function list,

OK activate.

85

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Stations

Update station list automatically

Some programme providers offer an automatic update of the station lists (Dynamic Channel Management). You may Allow or Block an automatic station list update. If automatic updating is allowed, a screen message about an available update appears whenever the list is changed.

Allow/block updates




Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Mark Update station list automatically ,

go to next column.

At once The station list will be immediately updated. Normally this occurs in the background without interfering further with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases, it is however possible that during this process an automatic station change may be necessary.

After switch off to standby

The channel list will be updated the next time the TV set is switched off into standby mode.

Later Updating the channel list will be postponed to a later date. When the TV set is switched on and off, the update message will appear again.


...

Allow

Block

If the channel list is not up to date, it will be automatically

updated provided the parameter "Allow" is selected.


You can export all station lists of your TV set to a USB storage device or import station lists.

Select Allow or Block ,

OK adopt.

If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated automatically, provided the option Allow is selected.

Updating the station list

A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network provider changes their channel list.

In Update station list automatically , Allow must be selected.

Calling Transfer all station lists




Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Mark Transfer all station lists ,

OK call.

...


Transfer all sation lists

Here you can export or import all station lists of this TV set. To do this, select the data storage device.

Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely disconnect it with 'Unmount' from the TV set to prevent data loss.

Attention: When you import station lists, all station lists are overwritten in this device!

Back

Export Import Unmount

Update station list

Because your network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted on your TV set as well. Please specify when you wish to do this.

At once

After switch off to standby

Later

Proceed with

Select the desired procedure.

Select a target if several USB storage media are available.

Mark Export or Import ,


When you import station lists, all station lists are overwritten in this device.

Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely disconnect it with ‚Unmount‘ from the TV set to prevent data loss.

86

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Control

In the chapter Control you find settings for the various operating modes like PIP and DR+ as well as settings referring in an interfunctional way to your TV set like, for example, time and date and on-screen displays.

Calling Control




Select Control ,

go to next column.

Control Language

Parental lock

EPG

Energy efficiency

Quick start mode

Software more ...

Here you can define the menu language and for DVB

stations also the subtitle and audio language.

Select desired menu item,

go to next column.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Control menu:

Language Here you can define the menu language and for DVB stations also the subtitle and audio language.

See chapter System settings , section Control –

Language for further information.

Parental lock

With the parental lock you can bar access to all stations immediately or daily for a certain period of time. The stations can also be locked individually.

Age-dependent locking of programs with an appropriate age code is also possible.


Parental lock for further information.

EPG Here you can do all EPG settings.


EPG for further information.

Energy efficiency

Here you can determine how energy efficient your

TV set shall be.


Energy efficiency for further information.

Quick start mode

Here you can enable the Quick Start Mode. The TV set will then immediately switch on from standby without delay.


Quick start mode for further information.

Software Here you can download new software from a USB storage medium or from the Internet (as far as requirements exist for this).


Software for further information.

more ...

After confirmation with the OK key you will be offered additional not so frequently used sub items for the current menu item.

On-screen displays

Here you can make settings for the duration, position and existence of special on-screen displays.


On-screen displays for further information.

Time and date

The time and date are normally obtained automatically from the TV.


Time and date for further information.

DVB settings Here you can make settings which only refer to DVB stations (subtitles and audio mode, DVB character set).


DVB settings for further information.

PIP In this menu you can make all adjustments for the picture-in-picture display.


PIP for further information.

DR+ Here you can do all the settings for the digital recorder.


DR+ for further information.

Standard

Teletext

Here you can do all Standard Teletext settings.


Standard Teletext for further information.

HbbTV Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.


HbbTV for further information.

Hard disks Here you find tools to format or check the hard disks.


Hard disks for further information.

Export log file The log file available in the system is exported to a

USB storage device.


Export log file .

key function

Here you can assign another function to the Web key . The selected function will then be called directly when the key is pressed.


Web key function for further information.

87

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Language

Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.

The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set for DVB programmes.

EPG

Calling EPG settings

Call language




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Language ,

go to next column.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark EPG ,

go to next column.

EPG Station selection TV

Please mark the stations with for which you want a

program preview.

OK

Language

Language Back

Data capture

TV on when memorised

Clear database

ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)

(pl) (da)

Italiano Suomi (fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru) č ina (sl) Norsk (no)

Nederlands Sloven č ina (sk) 中文 (zh)


You can change the menu language here.

Select desired setting and make changes.

OK Adopt settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:

Menu You can change the menu language here.

Subtitle

(DVB)

If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can set your desired language in advance here. If this is included in the range of languages of the station, it will be shown automatically.

You can also specify an alternative language under this menu item, in case your chosen language is not offered by the station.

Explanation of the EPG setting options:

Station selection TV

Station selection

Radio

In the Station selection you can determine for which station in the programme guide, information is to be displayed. Programme information is only displayed for stations with in the EPG list. Using the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you can mark all stations or unmark the stations or select stations from specific (e.g., personal) lists.

Further information on EPG station selection you find in chapter TV , section Electronic Programme

Guide – EPG wizard .

Due to the large number of receivable stations you should restrict the station selection. This reduces the data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.

Audio (DVB) Specify your desired film language in advance here.

If this is included in the range of languages of the station, it will be shown automatically.

You can also specify an alternative language under this menu item, in case your chosen language is not offered by the station.

Data capture

Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic programme guide (EPG) on and off.

If the data capture is switched on, your TV set tries to update the database overnight (normally between 2 and 5 am) or, if required, two minutes after switching to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by for this and not switched off at the mains switch.

The indicator on the TV set lights blue during data capture in stand-by mode.

The data are also updated while you are watching the EPG station.

TV on when memorised

When yes is selected in the setting, the switched off

TV switches on automatically in standby mode at the beginning of a memorised programme. A screen message appears when switching on. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK key , the TV switches automatically off again for safety reasons.

Clear data base

This menu item allows you to remove all data from

EPG database. It will take some time to retrieve this data again.

88

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Parental lock

You can select and set various security options to prevent unauthorised use of the TV set and to protect your children from unsuitable programmes.

Call Parental lock menu

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:

Lock all stations

The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited.

All programmes can then only be watched after entering the access code.

The lock can be activated both Immediately and for a Daily defined period.

The lock remains active until it is switched off in the menu.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Parental lock ,

go to next column.

Parental lock

Parental lock

Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.

(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).

Back

Lock single stations

You can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations in the station list specifically.

The lock remains active until it is switched off in the menu.

Age-related lock

Some DVB stations also broadcast an age classification. If the age set here is below the broadcast age limit, the programme can only be watched after entering the access code.

|

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Cancel

Change access code

You can change your access code at any time. Enter the new access code in place of the old one.

Deactivate All set parental locks (locked stations, agedependent locks, locked films in the DR+ archive) are cancelled. The current secret code is deleted.

When the parental lock is reactivated all the previous parental locks are set again automatically.

With the parental lock you can bar access to all stations immediately or daily for a certain period of time. The stations can also be locked individually. Age dependent locking of prorams with an appropriate age code is also possible.

Reset All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled.

The access code is deleted.

Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you open it. Note the access code (PIN) well.

The access code must not consist of the same four digits.

Mark Confirm ,

OK activate.

The new PIN must be entered and confirmed again.

The Parental lock menu will be opened.

Parental lock

Parental lock Back

Lock all stations Lock single stations Age-related lock Change acces code Deactivate

Immediately no yes

Daily no yes, from 00:00 until 00:00

Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes

Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of the CA module.

The Parental lock PIN of the CA module can be store in the TV set.

We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according to the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of the CA module cannot be changed. This means that you must only remember one secret number.

Code number

The code number cancels all entered access codes. It can be used for example if you have forgotten your PIN. In the supplied user guide you find a note on the access code number. Remove this one from the user guide and keep it in a safe place.

You can bar access to all stations. This can be done immediately or daily for a certain period of time.

The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered when the parental lock is opened in future. For security reasons, it appears encrypted ( **** ) when entering.

Note for unlocking

As soon as the PIN has once been entered to unlock your TV set, all currently set parental locks will be disabled temporarily. Besides of the general locks described in this chapter, this is also valid for parental lock of DR+ archive entries. Parental locks will only be re-enabled when the TV set is switched off.

89

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Energy efficiency

Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting) is adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated depending on the presetting.

Call Energy efficiency

Quick start mode

If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start

Mode.

Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy consumption.

Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: no




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Energy efficiency ,

go to next column.

...

Energy efficiency

Home Mode The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this

case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.

Premium

Mode

Shop Mode

Call Quick start mode




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Quick start mode ,

go to next column.

...

Quick start mode

Quick start mode Back

Here you can specify the times at which your device should be in quick start mode.

Period1 no yes, from 06:00 until 09:00

Period2 yes, from 11:00 until 15:00 no yes, from 18:00 until 21:00


OK Adopt settings.

Explanations of the setting options in the energy efficiency menu:

Home Mode The emphasis for home use is on low energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

Choosing Home Mode automatically activates shutdown.

Premium

Mode

This mode optimises the settings to a brighter environment at a higher energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.


Shop Mode The picture settings are aligned to operation in the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the energy consumption is not reduced.


Here you can specify the times at which your device should be in quick start mode.


You can individually change the suggested times.

OK Adopt settings.

90

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Software update

It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.

In the software update (package update) all the software releases in the TV are scanned and updated as required.

Here you can download a new piece of software from different sources

(if existing).

Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet site (see below) and installed on your TV set using a USB stick.

If your TV set is connected to the Internet, the TV set can be updated directly via the Internet (see chapter System settings , section

Control – Manual update via the Internet ).

Updating the software is not possible as long as a programmed timer recording is active.

When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update, check your timer list (see chapter TV , section Timer – Timer list ).

Please be aware of the requirements of your USB stick in section

Technical data – Media .

USB stick - requirements

USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.

If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/ conditions:

• Formatting in FAT32.

• Just one partition.

• Do not use encrypted USB sticks.

• Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.

• There may be no hidden files on the device.

• For some types of device, the construction of the USB stick is significant.

Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.

• If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without

“extended attributes”.

In order to avoid problems during the software update of the tv set the USB stick in use should meet the requirements.

Software download from the Loewe Internet site for update via USB

Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from our homepage.

Visit our homepage under: www.loewe.tv/int/supportportal (International), www.loewe.tv/uk/supportportal (United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland), www.loewe.tv/au/supportportal (Australia).

Choose the item Register free-of-charge on the Service Choose

Register for free on the support homepage. Simply follow the steps in the registration process.

After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the support homepage you have to register your TV set (have the article number and serial number ready – both of these are on a label stuck to the back of the set or can be looked up under System settings

ט

Extras

ט

Integrated features .

Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set including the software. Download the data and unpack all the files in this ZIP archive into the main directory of your USB stick.

Then carry out the software update as described below.

91

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Software update via USB storage device

To do this, plug the USB stick with the downloaded software into a free USB port of the TV set.

New software package found

Via USB

New software

Calling Software update

If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise close with the button.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Software ,

go to next column.

Mark Software update ,

go to next column.

Mark Via USB ,

call Software update.

The version of the software package that is currently installed will be displayed.

Or:

Proceed starts loading of the new software.

BACK: End of wizard .

The update will then not be carried out.

Load new software package

Via USB

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software

Current software: 1.1.11.0

To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a

USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the key to start the search.

Via USB

Updating software

The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...

60% in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during the loading and programming process.

Proceed with Cancel with

Note: Depending on the loaded software, it is possible that the device cannot automatically switch off after the update. Therefore, please monitor the update process.

Proceed .

The TV set searches for a new software package on the USB stick.

If a new software version is available after the search, an on-screen message appears (see right hand column).

If several different software packages are found on the

USB stick, the latest software package is always used.

If no new software package was found in the search:


The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes in total.

Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains switch during the entire loading and programming process.

After the update, the TV set is automatically powered off and on again.

Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that the device may not turn off automatically after the update. Therefore, please supervise the update process.

When the TV set is switched on again, a message is displayed.

Hint

The software was successfully updated.

Finish wizard with


92

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Manual update via the Internet

If an Internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded directly and installed onto the TV set.


Start update

New software

Calling Software update




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Software ,

go to next column.


go to next column.

Mark Via Internet ,

go to next column.

You will see a message on the screen regarding data protection.

...

Start update

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Data protection

In accordance with § 33 of the Federal Data Protection Act (BDSG) we point out that machine numbers and the installation site of your TV set , as well as the current updates and the current software status in each case, are processed and saved by a computer system if you use the button to confirm. This data ensures that we are always able to provide you with optimal service. All data is handled confidentially.

If you do not wish this to be the case, please press the button.

Proceed with End with

If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being passed on:

BACK: Exit the update process.


Or:





Only the parts of the software package that are not up to date will be automatically downloaded from the

Internet and updated.

Each part of the software is downloaded individually from the Internet and is then programmed.

The total time required for all the software parts to be downloaded from the Internet is dependent on the speed of data transfer that is being used.

The total programming process can take up to 50 minutes in total.


Otherwise: Confirm data protection message by pressing .

The version of the software package that is currently installed will be displayed.

...

Start update

Updating software


60%

-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: Depending on the loaded software, it is possible that the device cannot automatically switch off after the update. Therefore, please monitor

Start update



To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on the update server. Press the key to start the search.


Proceed .

The TV set connects to the Internet and scans the update server for new software.

If a new software version is available after the search, an on-screen message appears (see right hand column).







93

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Software update via Antenna

A software update via antenna is only available for stations of the

Freeview DVB-T platform in the UK and Ireland.


...

Via antenna

Updating software


60%

-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Calling Software update automatically switch off after the update. Therefore, please monitor the update process.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark Software ,

go to next column.


go to next column.

Mark Via Antenna ,

call Software update.

You will see a message on the screen regarding data protection.

...

Via antenna



For loading a new software, it is mandatory to have the antenna cable attached to the TV. Start search pressing the key .

Proceed with Cancel with

The software is downloaded in several steps. The total downloading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes in total.





Hint

The software was successfully updated.

Finish wizard with

Proceed .

The TV set searches for a new software package.

If a new software version is available after the search, an on-screen message appears (see below).




New software

...

Via antenna



Or:



94

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Automatic update via the internet

At the end of the initial installation, Information on new software updates was selected.

This item cannot be called up via the menu, but appears automatically when a new version is found in the search for software.


If the TV set has found a new software version during the check, you will be informed about this via a screen message.

Select the desired procedure.

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - New software

A new software version is now available and can be downloaded from the internet.

New software: V1.1.12.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)

Please specify how you would like to continue:

Load new software now

Load software when switching off to standby

Load software later (max. 3 times notification)

Do not load this software version

Adopt with OK

Load the software now

After confirmation, the new TV software will be loaded from the internet and then programmed.

Load the software when switch off to standby

The software will be loaded and programmed after the TV set has been switched off into standby mode for the next time. The display on the control panel will light up blue during the update.

The TV set must not be switched off at the mains before the downloading process is complete (control panel display lights up white)!

Load the software later (at most three-fold notification)

Loading the software will be postponed to a later date.

The new software message will be displayed the next time the TV set is switched on.

If the loading process is postponed three times then the message will only be shown again once the next software version is available.

Do not load this software version

The new software will not be loaded. The on-screen message will only be shown again for the next software version.

Confirm selection.

95

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

On-screen displays

You can select different settings in this menu which affect the onscreen displays.

Call On-screen displays




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,

call other settings.

Mark On-screen displays ,

go to next column.

On-screen displays

On-screen displays

Display time

Volume display

Automatic menu info off

Key explanation

off

Automatic HDMI hint off

Right info display

Switch off curtain

Back

Time and date

The time and date are normally acquired automatically by the TV set. If the data is missing or wrong, you can adjust it via the time and date menu.

Call Time and date




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Time and date ,

go to next column.

...

Time and date

Time and date

Data capture

Time zone < hour(s) > back

29.03.

End of daylight-saving time

Note: The following data is automatically obtained.

Time

Date 10.02.2015

If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear simultaneously.


OK Adopt settings.

If you need to manually set the time and date entries, turn off automatic mode.


OK Adopt settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen displays menu:

Display time Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for the volume or the station display when changing stations.

The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.

Volume display

Here you set whether a volume change is also to be indicated visibly on the screen.

Automatic menu info

Herewith you activate/deactivate the info text displays for the currently selected menu item.

Key explanation

If yes is set, the assignment of special remote control keys is indicated together with the TV status display.

Permanent clock display

The time display can be permanently shown. It is always visible as long as no other display is made.

Automatic

HDMI hint

If yes is set here, a message about the adapted function of the remote control is shown whenever you switch over to an HDMI channel position to which a

Digital Link HD capable TV set is connected.

Right info display

This activates/deactivates the right-hand additional on-screen display in the status bar when switching between channels.

Switch off curtain

Here you can specify whether there is a switch-off curtain (0 = no curtain) and how long this one needs for closing.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:

Data capture If you need to set the time and date entries manually, turn off the automatic setting here.

Time zone The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be understood as world time. The time shift in relation to this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13).

Changeover summer time

/ winter time

If the summer time in your country is changed to

Daylight-saving time, select yes please.

Beginning of daylightsaving time

Enter the date on which the time is switched over to summer time if it deviates from the automatically calculated date. This menu item appears only if yes was selected for Daylight-saving time.

Only possible when changeover summer time/ winter time – yes has been selected.

End of daylightsaving time

Enter the date on which the summer time ends if it deviates from the automatically calculated date.

This menu item appears only if yes was selected for

Daylight-saving time.

Only possible when changeover summer time/ winter time – yes has been selected.

Time

Date

Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) / date (day.month.

year) with the numerical keys of the remote control.

Only possible when Data capture - off or when time has not been automatically acquired.

96

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

DVB settings

You can make general pre-settings for DVB stations.

Calling DVB settings




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark DVB settings ,

go to next column.

DVB settings

...

DVB settings

Back

PIP

Adjust size of the PIP image

HOME: Call Home view .



Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark PIP ,

go to next column.

PIP Back

...

PIP

Here you may select the size of your Picture-in-Picture fade-in.

Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be selected.


OK Adopt settings.

Explanation of the DVB setting options:

Subtitle mode

Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station.

A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be selected.

Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations only broadcast subtitles by teletext.

DVB character set

Select the DVB character set so that the title of the broadcast of your favourite received station or the texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the PIP Settings menu:

Size You can choose if your second picture faded in

(picture in picture) shall be displayed small or large .

Audio commentary

You can preset the system here to always play a special soundtrack for the visually impaired whenever one is available. This soundtrack uses an audio commentary to describe the action taking place on-screen.

97

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

DR+

You can adapt the Digital Recorder to your requirements.

Call settings for the digital recorder




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark DR+ ,

go to next column.

...

DR+

Notify hidden sections

Jump distance

Smart Jump

You may set the pre-record and post-record times here.

Recording subtitles

DR+

Streaming

Mark desired setting,

go to next column.

Make settings,

OK confirm setting.

Explanation of the DR+ setting options

Recording You can set a pre-record and post-record time for timer recordings made without auto time control.

This minimizes the risk that a part of the broadcast is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier and/or finishing later.

Factory setting: pre-record time: 1 min , post-record time: 5 min .

Notify hidden sections

If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording, you can get informed by a screen message when skipping a hidden area.

Factory setting: yes .

Jump distance

Set the standard jump distance (in minutes) used for jumping forwards or backwards in the movie by briefly pressing the or keys.

Factory setting: 2 min .

Smart jump If the „Smart jump“ mode is activated you can approach a desired place by pressing the and buttons alternately and halving the jump width. After every 3rd jump in the same direction the jump width is doubled (up to a maximum of 8 minutes).

If off is set you always jump the same currently set jump width (time) with the and buttons.

Factory setting: on

Serial recording tolerance

The serial recording tolerance is necessary to avoid recording a serial more than once when it is broadcast more than once a day.

It is only recorded when it begins within the given time interval (start time +- series recording tolerance).

Use the numeric button on the remote control to enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min.).

Factory setting:

±

30 min .

Recording subtitles

Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded for

DVB stations.

Factory setting: no (1 .

DR+

Streaming

With this, all the settings are activated to make all the films on your DR+ archive available to other

LOEWE TVs using your home network (or vice-versa, e.g. allowing you to use the DR+ archive of other

LOEWE TVs).

See next page for further information.

(1 for devices in DK, FIN, N or S: yes .

98

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Call DR+ streaming settings

The DR+ settings are called (see previous page).

Mark DR+ Streaming ,

go to next column.

...

DR+

Streaming

Share DR+ ar If you select "yes" here, you will make the DR+ archive of

your TV set available to any other TV sets and UPnP clients equipped with this feature. They will then be able to access the archive over your home network.

Notify start-

DR+ device name

DR+ device group name

IP port number

DR+ standby

Standard Teletext

In the Standard Teletext menu you can configure the Teletext.

Call Teletext settings




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Standard Teletext ,

go to next column.


go to next column.

Make settings,

OK confirm setting.

...

Standard

Teletext

Character set

The programme preview pages and the page for the programme subtitles are specified here.

Explanation of the setting options for DR+ streaming

Share DR+ archive with other devices

Specify here whether recorded broadcasts within your TV set’s DR+ archive are to be accessible for viewing from other TV sets (server function).

Enabled programmes can also be played on other

UPnP-AV clients in the same network.

Also use other archives.

Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view recordings from other TV sets that have accessible movies within the home network (client function).

Notify started

„Follow me“ recording

Your TV set can issue a message if a follow-me recording has been started on another TV set, which you can view on this TV set..

DR+ device name

Give your TV set a unique name for quick identification in DR+ Streaming.

DR+ device group name

Give a name for your TV set group.

Using different group names enables you to group your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the same group name can exchange data.

IP port number

IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal circumstances they do not require amending.

DR+ standby

Set here how long your TV set is to continue to give access to movies after it has been switched off.

This stand-by period is also activated as soon as data exchange to another TV set has been completed.

Please be aware of increased stand-by use during

DR+ stand-by.

Explanations of the Standard Teletext menu functions:

Character set Teletext character set can be switched to other languages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).

99

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

HbbTV

Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.

Call HbbTV settings




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark HbbTV ,

go to next column.

...

HbbTV HbbTV mode

When the HbbTV mode (Hybrid broadcast broadband TV

mode) ist actvie, additional services and further information

(e.g. from the Internet) can be viewed if these offered by the current station.


go to next column.

Make settings,

OK confirm setting.

Explanation of the setting options for HbbTV

HbbTV-

Modus

When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting), additional services and further information (e.g., also from the Internet) can be viewed if these are offered by the current station.

Start behaviour of

HbbTVstations

If HbbTV mode – on has been selected, you can specify if an available HbbTV application should be loaded automatically after the channel has been changed or if this should only occur manually after the red key has been pressed once.

The startup behaviour can be set for TV and radio stations.

After loading the HbbTV application, an on screen message is displayed (depending on the channel that is being viewed).

Function of the TEXT key

With the setting Standard Teletext first (factory setting), the standard Teletext is opened when the

TEXT key is pressed for the first time. Pressing the

TEXT key for a second time will then display the

MediaText. Pressing the TEXT key for a third time will bring you back to the TV picture. If MediaText first is selected, the TEXT key will do the exact opposite.

Depending on the programme provider, the direct

Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText must then be opened by means of the HbbTV application.

WEB key function

You can assign the Web key on the remote control unit a particular function (MediaNet, picture/sound menu, sound mode, etc.).

The selected function will then be called directly when the key is pressed.

Call WEB key settings

Default setting: MediaNet




Select Control ,

go to next column.

Select more ...

,


Select key function ,

go to next column.

...

key function The selected function is then accessed directly when the button is pressed.

Sound/picture music

Sound mode

Picture format

Headphone volume

3D

Internet radio

Photo

Video

Select function,

OK Adopt.

Adopt with

OK

100

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Rotate TV

Here you can set the range of rotation for the motorized stand and define the switch-off position of your TV set.

Menu item Rotate TV appears only if you have an installation with motorized stand.

Specifying the switch-off position

This is where you specify the position that the TV will take when it is switched off. In order for the TV set to return to the determined switchoff position when switching it off, this must be activated (see below).

Setting the range of rotation (rotation wizard)

By means of the rotation wizard you can define the rotation range of the TV set (maximum +/- 45 degrees) by setting the maximum right and left stop position.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Rotate TV ,

go to next column.

Select Basic adjustments ,

call Basic adjustment.

Basic adjustment

Rotation Wizard - Maximum right rotation Position

Turn your TV to the RIGHT as far as the installation location allows.

This is the maximum right turning position in future.

-45° +31° +45°




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Rotate TV ,

go to next column.

Select Set switch-off position ,

call .

WIZARD start into standby mode. When you continue with , your TV set firstly rotates to the currently set switch-off position (provided that it has been specified).

-45° +18° +45°

Call dialogue for setting the new switch-off position.

Set desired switch-off position.

The switch off position can only be defined within the set rotation range (see left column).

End of wizard.

Basic adjustments (to the right)

Rotate your TV set to the right as far as the installation site allows.

This will be the maximum right rotation position in future.

proceed.

Basic adjustment

Maximum right rotation Position

Turn your TV to the RIGHT as far as the installation location allows.

This is the maximum right turning position in future.

-45° -32° +45°

Basic adjustments (to the left)

Turn your TV set to the left as far as the installation site of your set allows.

This will be the maximum left rotation position in future.

End of wizard.

Activating the switch-off position

If the TV set is switched off with the on/off key on the remote control or at the control panel then it will turn to the defined switch-off position.

When it is switched back on, it returns to the position last set.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Rotate TV ,

go to next column.

Select Activate switch-off position , go to the next menu line below.

Select yes ,

OK adopt.

101

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Hard disks

Checking the hard disk

You should launch a check of the integrated hard disk once a year or if problems arise when starting recordings (e.g. when transferring to time-shift playback).

Formatting the hard disk

If problems were detected when the hard disk was being tested (see left column), re-formatting may be able to remedy the problem.

Additionally, you can re-format the hard disk in order to quickly and easily delete all the data stored on it.

Warning!

Formatting the hard disk will erase all data stored on it!

Call hard disk settings




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Hard disks ,

go to next column.

Mark Check integrated one , confirm.

A warning note will be displayed.

...

Hard disks Check integrated one iniciar grabaciones (por ej., en el paso a la reproducción en diferido), deberá llevar a cabo

Format external one

Attention

Checking the hard drive can take up to 20 minutes. To start the process, hold down the

button for at least three seconds.




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Hard disks ,

go to next column.

Mark Format integrated one or Format external one , confirm.

A warning note will be displayed.

...

Hard disks

Check integrated one

Format external one

If problems should occur when operating the

integrated hard drive, it may be possible to eliminate these by formatting the hard drive.

However, please note that all of the data on the storage medium will be deleted in the process.

This also affects the station logos that are stored on the hard drive. If the TV is not connected to the Internet, station logos will no longer be available to you in the future.

CAUTION do you really want to format the integrated hard drive?

Formatting deletes all the data on the hard drive.

To start formatting, hold down the button for at least three seconds.

OK Press at least for three seconds to start the checking.

Or:

BACK: Cancel procedure.

Checking the hard disk (check disk) may take up to

20 min. Never ever switch off the TV set during a check disk process.

After the check, a message will appear on the screen showing the results of the check and tips on how to resolve any problems that are present, should there be any.

After checking of the hard disk the TV set must be switched off and on again.

OK

Or:

Press at least for three seconds to start formatting.

BACK: Cancel procedure

Never ever switch off the TV set during a formatting process.

After the formatting, a message will appear on the screen showing the results of the formatting and tips on how to resolve any problems that exist, should there be any.

After the formatting the TV set must be switched off and on again.

Note on formatting external USB disks:

The TV set supports the two hard disk file systems FAT 32 and NTFS.

External hard disks are formatted by the TV in the FAT32 file system to full capacity.

With FAT32, the maximum size of a file is 4 GB.

For a parallel use of TV and PC, we recommend that you reformat the hard disk on a PC to NTFS.

102

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Control

Export log file

To resolve problems, a log file can be provided for the service. The log file can be exported to a USB storage device or manually or automatically transferred via the Internet.

The log file can be transferred via the Internet only when an online connection exists. The transferred data is anonymous and purely of technical nature without reference to person, location or IP address.

Browser history or login details are not stored or transferred.

Call export of the log file




Mark Control ,

go to next column.

Mark more ...

,


Mark Export log file ,

go to next column.

...

Export log file

Export log file Back

Dear Sir or Madam,

For securing our quality standards and for statistical analysis your device transmits technical data to our server.

This data is anonymous and of a technical nature without reference to person, location or IP address.

All data will be deleted from our servers not later than 4 weeks.

More information can be found in our privacy policy.

(https://www.loewe.tv/uk/service/datenschutz.html)

I agree I don't agree

Confirm with

OK

When selecting Via USB :

Select a target if several USB storage media are available.

Mark Export ,


Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely disconnect it with Unmount from the TV set to prevent data loss.

When selecting Settings :

...

Export log file

Export log file

Via Internet Via USB Settings

Hereby you enable/disable the automatic export of the problem file as soon as a problem situation has occurred. The file is transferred to the

Loewe server and stored there.

Autom. export on off

Back

Mark the desired setting.

Autom.

Export

Herewith you enable/disable the automatic export of the problem file as soon as a problem situation has occurred.

When set to on , the file is automatically transferred to the Loewe server and stored as soon as a problem situation has occurred.

Select I agree , if you accept the privacy policies,


...

Export log file

Export log file Back

Via Internet Via USB Settings

Here you can export the log file existing in the system. This one can be provided to the service for troubleshooting.

Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely disconnect it with “Unmount” from the TV set to prevent data loss.

Export Unmount

Select Via Internet , Via USB or Settings .

When selecting Via Internet :

Mark Export log files now ,


This transfers all stored log files to the Loewe server.

After successful transmission, a reference number will be displayed that you can specify as a reference when making inquiries.

103

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Multimedia / Network

Network settings

Under Network settings you make settings to your network adaptors and the various types of media.

Network

The network wizard guides you through all the necessary settings relevant to your network

At the beginning you see the current network status.

Call network settings




Mark Multimedia / Network ,

go to next column.

Mark Network settings ,

go to next column.

Network status ...

Networking

WIZARD status

Current settings:

Networking

Additional information: address 172.16.10.141

Subnet

Gateway

DNS server address 18:16:0f:71:af:92


...

Network settings

Networking

The following antenna wizard guides you through all the

necessary settings relevant to your network.

Host name

Proxy server

Wake on

LAN/WiFi

Security hint


...

Networking

Internet Security hint

This next step allows you to connect your TV device to the Internet. This enables you to use of a number of different services and get the most out of your device’s technical capabilities.

For data protection reasons, we would like to point out that once the device is connected to the Internet data will be transferred between your TV device and the Internet as this is a prerequisite for use. As a result, your TV device is subject to the same risks and dangers as any other device with Internet capabilities, e.g. computer, smartphone, etc.

In this respect, Loewe guarantees that this data will not be personally exploited in any way. However, a statistical analysis of anonymised data records may be carried out. If you have any questions, please contact your dedicated Loewe advisor or call the Loewe Hotline.

Select desired menu item,

go to next column.

Explanations of the setting options in the network menu:

Networking Here, the network wizard starts that guides you through all necessary settings to your network (see right hand column).

Reset to factory settings

Here, all network settings are reset to factory defaults.

Host name Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely identified in the network.

Proxy server Do the settings for using a proxy server. The proxy server wizard will be called.

See chapter System settings , section Multimedia

/ Network – Proxy server for further information.

Wake on

LAN/WiFi

If you allow Switch on via LAN/WLAN, the TV set can be switched on via the network when it is in standby.

After switching off the TV set into standby mode, it takes minimum 30 seconds for the TV set to be ready for reception of a signal (Wake on LAN/

WLAN) to power on via LAN/WLAN.

Thus, energy consumption of the TV set will increase when it is in standby mode!

Network mode



...

Networking Please select the desired network mode from the list or switch it off completely.

.


off

On, wired only

On, wireless only

Back with

Select network mode.

Select how you want to connect your TV set to your network.


Off Deactivates all existing network adaptors of your

TV set.

On, wired only

Access to the network only via a network cable.

The wireless access is deactivated.

On, wireless only

Access to the network only via WLAN.

The access via a network cable is deactivated.

Depending on which type of network (wireless or wired) was selected, the appropriate settings appear below.

104

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings


Configuration of the built-in LAN adaptor

As network operation was selected On, wired only .

IP

configuration ...

Networking

IP configuration

You can define the necessary parameters for the IP configuration yourself through a DHCP server or by means of several protocols in accordance with the

"Universal Plug and Play" specification (UPnP)."

Automatic Manual

Configuration of the built-in WLAN bridge adaptor

As network operation was selected On, wireless only .

The TV set now searches for wireless routers.

Access point selection ...

Networking

Access point selection

Please choose the access point to which the TV should connect.

FritzBox 7490

Netgear

Router ABC


Search again Enter access point manually

Back with Proceed with manual

Select type of IP configuration .

automatic Automatic configuration of the IP address via DHCP server or via multiple protocols according to UPnP specification (including DHCP).

After selecting IP configuration – automatic proceed to the network status.

Enter your fixed IP addresses manually.

Manual IPconfiguration

If manual has been selected under IP configuration :

...

Netzworking

Please specify the static IP address of the network adapter.

.

IP address 192.168.000.123

Subnet mask 255.255.255.000

Gateway 192.168.000.100

DNS server 1 192.168.000.010

DNS server 2 192.168.001.010


WPA passphrase

After the end of the search:

Select a base station to which the TV shall be connected.

OK Confirm selection and proceed to the entry of the

Wi-Fi password.

If the desired access point is not found:

Mark Search again ,

OK repeat search for wireless routers.

Or:

Mark Enter access point manually ,

OK enter manually the SSID of the desired access point, e.g., when the SSID of the access point is not transferred.

...

Networking

WPA passphrase

The selected base station uses WPA encryption, for which a password consisting of between 8 and 64 characters is required. Please insert it in the dialogue below.


Network status

Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server addresses in succession with the numerical keys on the remote control.

Proceed to network status .

...

Networking

WIZARD status

Current settings:

Networking

IP

Wired

Automatic

Additional information: address 172.16.10.141

Subnet server

DNS


You see the current network status again.

BACK: End of wizard.

The TV set automatically detects the type of encryption used and informs you. You will find the supported encryption types in chapter Technical data .

If your wireless network is not encrypted: Proceed to

IP configuration .

Proceed to password entry.

Enter WLAN password.

In case of an unknown WLAN key, contact your network administrator.

For WEP encryption

Select the WEP index ,

OK proceed to IP configuration .

Select type of IP configuration .

For the further workflow of the network wizard see left column under IP configuration .

105

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings


Explanation of the settings in the network status:

Network shows the current type of connection ( wireless or wired ).

IP configuration

The current assignment method for the IP address of your TV set ( automatic or manual ).

IP address Your current IP address.

Subnet mask Your current subnet-mask IP address.

Proxy server

In the proxy server wizard you make arrangements for your TV set for a connection with a home network with proxy server.

A proxy server is not necessary for most home networks.

Contact your home network administrator if you are unclear about the proxy server settings.

Use proxy server ...

Proxy server

Proxy server - Use proxy server

Here you can choose whether to use a proxy server for network access or not.

Don‘t use Use


Gateway The IP address of your gateway.

DNS server 1 Your current first DNS server IP address.

DNS server 2 Your current second DNS server IP address.

Proxy server name

Specify if a Proxy server is used in your home network.

Mark Use or Don’t use ,

The following settings will only be requested after the selection of Use .


...

Proxy server

Proxy server name

In the following dialogue, please enter the proxy server's name or IP address.

.


Network

SSID

(for wireless connection only)

The name of your network.

MAC address

(TV)

(for wired connection only)

Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware of your TV set’s wired network adaptor (LAN).

MAC address

(WLAN)

(for wireless connection only)

Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware of your TV set’s wireless network adaptor

(WLAN).

Connection status

Gives you information about the current status of your wireless connection (save settings, connecting, login failed, access point not found, not connected, connection established).

Link quality

Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.

Proxy port number

Proceed to entry of the proxy server name.

Specify the name or IP address of the proxy server used.


...

Proxy server

Proxy port number

Please specify the proxy server's port number in the following dialogue.

.


Proceed to entry of the proxy port number.

Specify the network port number of the proxy server.

Proxy server login


...

Proxy server

Proxy server login

Here you can specify whether the indicated proxy server requires you to log in

No login Login necessary


Specify whether your proxy server requires a special login.

Mark No login or Login necessary ,


Enter your login data for the proxy server.

User name and password are requested only after selecting Proxy server login .

106

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings


Multimedia settings

Under this menu item you find further settings for Audio, Video and

Photo.

Renderer

Here you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer) via app to render (play back) contents there.

Calling the Multimedia settings menu





go to next column.

Mark Multimedia settings ,

go to next column.

Call up renderer menu

Default setting: on





go to next column.

Mark Renderer ,

go to next column.

...

Multimedia settings

When navigating through the files if you pause in this view

you can input whether and when the view should automatically return to the player.

...

Renderer on off

You can allow external devices here and access your TV

(renderer) via an app to play content there.

Select desired settings.

Explanations of the setting options in the Multimedia settings menu:

Auto return to music player

The music player will reappear whenever another dialogue, e.g., music selection is called during playback, and no keys are pressed for the set time period.

You can specify if and after which time the music player reappears (selection options are No , After

1 min , After 5 min ).

Select the setting on or off .

107

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings


Mobile Recording

Mobile recording enables you to program recordings on your TV from far away.

Basically, the function is based on a simple e-mail correspondence. If the mobile recording function is activated and set, the TV set scans an e-mail account at regular intervals.

If a record command is sent by the Loewe Assist Smart App , this command reaches a connecting server.

From here, a short text email is sent to the appropriate email account.

The TV set can receive this information and program / start a recording accordingly.

You can download the Loewe Assist Smart App for free for iOS and Android in the appropriate app store.

The TV set must not be switched off using the power switch, otherwise the email mailbox can not be scanned.

The TV set must be connected to the Internet.

The programmed timer recordings of the Mobile Recording function are handled by the TV set with highest priority.

If at this time other recordings are programmed for the same recording period, they will be overwritten by the new recording or parts of the recording cut off.

Start/end of the scanning period

Here, the start and end times are displayed depending on the scanning period.

If you wish to enter start / end of the scanning period individually, you must select user defined for scanning period.

In the last step it is checked whether the email account is accessible with the set data.

On successful test the configuration is completed.

Settings of personal email account

If the mailbox defined by the system was selected as the default email account, the account is automatically created on the server. You do not need to make further settings.

When selecting Configure email account ט Manual you need to adjust the factory defaults and enter the settings of your existing personal email account.

You will find the necessary parameters in the menu dialogues Settings/

Options of your email programme you are using (e.g. Outlook,

Thunderbird) or from the relevant provider of your email accounts.

Open settings for Mobile Recording




Select Multimedia / Network

go to next column.

,

Select Mobile Recording ,

OK call.

The Mobile Recording wizard is started.

Select yes for Function enabled .

Select Configure email account ט Automatic / Manual .

When selecting Configure email account

ט

Manual , enter your own settings for personal mailbox account

(see right column).

When selecting Configure email account

ט

Automatic , the system mailbox will be used. In the next step, the TV set displays the email address and the security

PIN of the system mailbox.

Continue until the setting of scanning times.

Carry out settings.

Settings of scanning times

When the TV set is in standby mode, you can determine the times at which the TV automatically checks the defined mailbox for remote programming.

If the TV set is switched on or in the Quick Start mode, a fixed inspection interval of 10 minutes applies permanently.

Scanning period

Inspection interval

Here you can specify the period during which the TV set checks the email account.

Here you can specify the time interval at which the

TV set checks the email account in the specified period.

Default settings page 1:

Email address:

Account type:

Incoming mail server:

Outgoing mail server (SMTP):

Username:

Password:

Secure PIN:

Default settings page 2:

Incoming mail server port:

Incoming encryption:

Server equires authentification:

Outgoing mail server port:

Outgoing encryption:

Delete mail from server:

Email account settings [email protected]

POP3 or (IMAP) mail.loewe-dialogue.com

mail.loewe-dialogue.com

[email protected]

************** xxxx

995 (POP3),0 993 (IMAP)

‘no‘ , ‘SSL’ , ‘StartTSL’

‘no‘

‘25’ (no), ‘587’ (StartTSL), ‘465’ (SSL)

‘no‘ , ‘SSL’ , ‘StartTSL’

‘no‘

Reset

Remote programming via any email client

In addition to the comfortable remote programming via the Loewe

Smart Assist App, you have the possibility to do the remote programming of the recording with any e-mail client.

The subject line of the email must include the defined four-digit secure pin, the broadcasting time and the station:

PIN BROADCASTING TIME OF STATION

Example: 1234 20:45 Das Erste HD

1234 8.45 pm Das Erste HD

Timer programming of a broadcast, which runs on the current day around 20:45 on the tv station Das Erste HD . An exact specification of start and end time of the programme is not required.

The station name must not be 100% accurate, the name is compared by means of a certain algorithm. It is advisable, however, to store the station name as a note in the smartphone.

If the recording time is more than 24 hours in the future, the date must also be specified in the subject line:

1234 04/09/2014 20:45 Das Erste HD

1234 09/04/2014 8.45 pm Das Erste HD

You will get an email response as confirmation from the TV set (only for personal mailbox account) with the current list of programmed timer recordings.

108

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings


Bluetooth

With the Bluetooth functionality, you can use a wireless connection between your TV set and a Bluetooth-enabled audio source, such as smartphone, tablet, etc. and use the TV set as a playback device

(Bluetooth music player).

When pairing a Bluetooth keyboard you can comfortably enter your characters, e.g. to search for your favourite artists.

The TV set can be connected to several Bluetooth devices. However, only one active link is possible at the same time.

The distance between your TV set and the Bluetooth device should not exceed 10 m (line of sight).

Your Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP standard.

Your Bluetooth Keyboard must support the HID standard.

Calling the Bluetooth function

Coupling starting from the Bluetooth device

Enable the Bluetooth function of your audio source.

If necessary, get help from the instruction manual of your audio source.

If necessary, use the Bluetooth search function of the audio source. Now, Bluetooth devices will be searched near the audio source.

Select loewetv_x (device name ex-factory, where x is a character string).

The device name appearing in Bluetooth search can be set in the System settings under Multimedia /

Network

ט

Network settings

ט

Host name .

Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see below.

Confirm the code specified for the coupling. The

Bluetooth device is connected to the TV set.

Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see below.




Select Multimedia / Network ,

go to next column.

Select Bluetooth ,

OK call.

Bluetooth Music Player

To use the TV set as a playback device for audio streaming, your smartphone, tablet (audio source) must be paired with the TV set.

After successful coupling of your audio source, you can start the audio playback on your audio source.

The sound is played back on the TV set.

For some audio sources, the link must be explicitly enabled before music playback can be heard from the TV set.

...

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Enable function no yes

Back

Internetradio -> Antenne Bayern Classic Rock Live Back

Searching ...

Cancel search

Bluetooth

Here you can enable the Bluetooth function of your TV set. Then, the TV set will be visible to other Bluetooth devices.

Enable function

Here you enable the Bluetooth function of your TV set. Then, the TV set is visible to other Bluetooth devices.

Default setting: yes .

Switch screen off.


Switching the screen ON again:

Green button , press OK or BACK .

The search for Bluetooth devices in the nearby area starts automatically for 2 min.

If Bluetooth devices are available, they are displayed in a list.

Open settings:

Favourite, Sound settings, Headphone volume,

System settings.

Coupling starting from the TV set

Select required device.

OK Connect the device. Before the connected device a check mark ۪ is set.

In the event that a code is needed, the TV set will generate a connection PIN. This one must be entered on the Bluetooth device and confirmed if required.

Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see right column.

Volume setting on the Bluetooth music player

With the keys V+/Vplayback device.

on the remote control the volume can be adjusted for the TV set as usual.

According to manufacturer/type of your Bluetooth device, the volume can be adjusted directly on the

If you listen to your music during the Bluetooth playback with volume 60, then this volume generally applies also to your TV sound.

It is recommended to set the volume of the audio source to high values and to adjust the actual volume of the TV set by means of the remote control unit.

109

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings


Bluetooth Keyboard

To use a Bluetooth keyboard as an input device, it must be coupled to the TV set.

Bluetooth function menu opened.

Select required device.

OK Connect the device. Before the connected device a check mark

۪ is set.

In the event that a code is needed, the TV set will generate a connection PIN. If your Bluetooth device uses the PIN code 0000, there will be an automatic connection. If your Bluetooth device uses a different code, this must be entered on the

Bluetooth device and also confirmed, if necessary.

After successful pairing, you can simply type all the characters that can be entered using the on-screen keyboard or the remote control unit independently with your Bluetooth keyboard.

Most remote control key functions can be accessed using the keyboard. An overview of the key assignments is shown in the table.

Key assignment

No.

1

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

Remote control

Sound On/Off key

TV key

STB key

DR+ key

Favourites key

EPG key

TEXT key

MENU key

V+ key

OK key

V– key

1

33

12

13

14

15

Green key

Red key

ܓ key

RECORD key

2

3

4

5

32

31

30

16

17

18

19

PAUSE key

STOP key

ܒ key

PLAY key

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

28

29

30

31

32

33

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

Blue key

Yellow key

P– key

Directional keys

P+ key

BACK key

INFO key

PIP key

HOME key

Number keys

WEB key

VIDEO key

AUDIO key

On/Off key

Keyboard

-----

Alt + I

-----

Alt + A

0 ... 9

Alt + H

-----

Alt + R

-----

-----

-----

F4

F3

-----

Arrow button

-----

Alt + ESC

-----

F5

-----

-----

Enter

-----

-----

-----

Alt + F

-----

Alt + W

Alt + Z

Alt + E

Alt + T

Alt + M

-----

110

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Connections

Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this menu.

The menu item Connections is not available while a timer recording is active.

Calling the connections menu




Mark Connections ,

go to next column.

Connections Sound components

Antenna

DVB

AV connecting settings

Digital Link

A wizard guides you step by step through the

configuration of your sound reproduction components.

Gaming mode

Select desired settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:

Sound components

The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components that are used to reproduce the TV sound.

See chapter System settings , section Connections

– Sound components for further information.

Antenna DVB Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and the DVB-S antenna with the antenna wizard.


– Antenna DVB for further information.


In the AV connecting settings the parameters for the

AV connection socket can be adapted.


– AV connecting settings for further information.

Digital Link All settings for Digital Link are made here.


– Digital Link for further information.

Gaming mode

Here you can set a faster display of your activities on the screen for various inputs of the TV set, e.g., for games consoles.


– Gaming mode for further information.

111

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Sound components

The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you can configure the TV loudspeakers, active loudspeakers, loudspeaker systems as well as analogue and digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.

Your TV set is equipped with an integrated digital multi-channel audio decoder. Sound signals with up to six channels (5.1 surround sound) can be emitted through the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK interface, irrespective of whether the sound signal comes from an external device

(DVD player, Blu-ray player) or from a DVB station.

For sound formats supported by the digital audio decoder, see chapter

Technical data .

Calling the sound components wizard

For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General information on menu operation .




Select Connections ,

go to next column.

Select Sound components ,

go to next column.

Sound components

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...

Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your

TV sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if necessary).


OK

TV speakers

Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)

HiFi/AV amplifier



Sound playback via ...

Some sound components can only be selected when the respective device is connected to the TV set.

TV speakers

Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers

(factory setting).

With the selection of TV speakers the wizard will end.

Speaker system

(AUDIO OUT) (1

Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or active loudspeakers (connection to AUDIO OUT).

How to connect a speaker system to AUDIO OUT, see chapter External devices , section Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) .

How to configure a speaker system at AUDIO OUT, see chapter System settings , section Connctions

– Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) .

If a speaker system is connected to AUDIO OUT and you want to return to selecting TV speakers , switch the subwoofer of the speaker system off before you select the TV speakers . At the AUDIO

OUT connection, the audio signal is output with maximum volume setting in the TV speaker selection.

Speaker system

(DIGITAL

AUDIO LINK)

Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or active loudspeakers (connection to DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK).

How to connect a speaker system to DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK, see chapter External devices , section

Connecting the speaker system (DAL) .

How to connect active speakers to DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK, see chapter External devices , section

Connecting active loudspeakers (DAL) .

How to configure a speaker system at DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK , see chapter System settings , section

Connections – Adjusting the speaker system

(DAL) .

Select Sound component.

For selectable items see right hand column.



HiFi/AV amplifier

Sound reproduction via an external analogue or digital audio amplifier.

How you connect a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter

External devices , section Connecting the HiFi/

AV amplifier .

How you configure a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter

System settings , section Connections –

Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier .

HiFi/AV amplifier or

TV speakers

(switchable)

Sound reproduction optionally via an external analogue or digital audio amplifier or via the built-in

TV loudspeakers.

The selection options for switching between sound components can be called via the function list under Sound settings .

(1 Available as of software version 2.1.x.

112

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) (1

Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system connected to AUDIO OUT.

For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General information on menu operation .

Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) was selected in the Sound components wizard. Afterwards you can switch on the power switch of the subwoofer.

Connect speakers

...

Sound components

Connect speakers

Please specify here whether you are using the

TV speakers with an additional subwoofer or if you wish to connect a subwoofer + external front speakers. (AUDIO OUT socket).

TV

0dB

TV

TV speakers + Subwoofer Subwoofer + ext. front speakers


Subwoofer + ext. front speakers

TV loudspeakers as centre speaker

...

Sound components

TV loudspeakers as centre speaker

Please specify whether you want to use your built-in TV speakers as active centre speakers of your multi-channel speaker system.

0dB

0dB

TV no yes


0dB

Select yes here if you want to use the built-in TV speakers as centre speakers.

If you select no here, the external front speakers also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.

Proceed to connect the Subwoofer .

Select TV speakers + Subwoofer or Subwoofer

+ ext. front speakers .

Specify here whether you want to operate the speakers of the TV set with an additional subwoofer or a subwoofer with external front speakers at the AUDIO OUT socket of the TV set.

Continue with the appropriate selection.

Adjust ext.

Speakers level

...

Sound components

Adjust ext. Speakers level

Here you can optimally adjust the volume of the external sound system to the TV's volume.

3dB

3dB

TV

3dB

-12 dB +3 dB +12 dB


TV speakers + Subwoofer

Adjust subwoofer level

...

Sound components

Adjust subwoofer level

You can adapt the volume of the subwoofer optimally to the TV volume.

TV

2dB

TV

Level

-12 dB +2 dB +12 dB


Adjust the volume of the ext. sound system optimally to the TV volume.

An audio broadband signal is transmitted via the AUDIO OUT jack. Therefore, the level of the front speakers and the subwoofer varies uniformly with the volume setting.

Back: Finish wizard.

This ends the sound components wizard for connecting and setting up a speakers system.

Adjust the volume for the subwoofer.



(1 Available as of software version 2.1.x.

113

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Adjusting the speaker system (DAL)

Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)

Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system connected to Digital Audio Link. If you connect active speakers, please use the setting Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK) .

For information on navigation within the wizard see chapter General information on menu operation .

When setting up the speaker system for the first time, the configuration starts with the step Connect front speakers .

Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK) was selected in the Sound components wizard.

Configuration/ modification ...

Sound components

Speaker system

Please specify whether you want to change the illustrated setting of your speaker system or whether all existing settings are to be reset to the values of the delivery state.


Components Distances Level

100Hz

100Hz

90Hz 100Hz

100Hz

4,0m

3,9m

2,0m

3,0m 4,0m

2,0m

0dB

0dB

0dB

0dB 0dB

0dB

Configuration/modification Reset to factory settings

Back with

Connect surround speakers

Select the start value of the frequency response of the speakers for the correct setting (e.g., 50Hz for t h e s p e c i f i c a t i o n “ Fre q u e n c y re s p o n s e

50-20,000Hz”). See the technical data of the speakers for the value.

You can replace the external front speakers by the

TV speakers if necessary. In this case, TV speakers .

Then, the TV speakers transmit the sound of the front speakers.

Proceed to connect and set the surround speakers .

...

Sound components

Connect surround speakers

Please specify here whether you want to connect external surround speakers. In this case, their lower limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see instruction manual and technical data of the speakers).

no yes

100Hz 100Hz 100Hz

100Hz 100Hz


Configuration/ modification

If you want to set up or change a speaker system:

Select Configuration/modification.

If nothing has been set yet, the factory settings or otherwise the last set values are displayed.


...

Sound components

Configuration/modification of speaker system

Please specify here whether you wish to fully set up a speaker system for the first time or wish to completely modify an existing one or whether you wish to restrict yourself to changing the speaker connections, changing the distances of the speakers from the listening position or altering the individual volume levels.


OK

Complete

Connections only

Distances only

Levels only

Back with End with

Connect centre speaker

Select yes or no for the external surround speakers.

In case, external speakers were chosen as surround speakers:

Select frequency bar set the lower limit frequency of the surround speakers in 10 Hz steps.

Select the start value of the frequency response of the speakers for the correct setting.

Proceed to connect and set the centre speaker .

...

Sound components

Connect centre speaker

Please specify here whether you wish to use a centre speaker. This function can be fulfilled by the TV speakers, if they are not used as front speakers, or by an external speaker. In the latter case, its lower limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see instruction manual and technical data of the speakers).

100Hz

100Hz

90Hz 100Hz

100Hz no TV speakers External speaker


Select Complete .


Connect front speakers

Proceed to connect and set the front speakers .

...

Sound components

Connect front speakers

Please specify here whether you wish to use the TV speakers or external front speakers as front speakers. In the latter case, their lower limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see instruction manual and technical data of the speakers).

TV speakers External speakers

100Hz

100Hz

100Hz 100Hz

100Hz


Select External speakers or TV speakers .

For External speaker go to the frequency bar below and set the lower limit frequency of the external front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.

Select whether the TV speakers or an External speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no if no centre speaker is connected.

If no centre speaker is connected, the front speakers also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.

For External speaker go to the frequency bar below and set the Lower Limit Frequency of the external front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.

Select the start value of the frequency response of the speakers for the correct setting.

Proceed to connect the Subwoofer .

continued on the next page p

114

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Connect subwoofer

...

Sound components

Connect subwoofer

Please specify here whether you want to additionally connect a subwoofer for very good bass reproduction.

100Hz 90Hz 100Hz

100Hz 100Hz no yes


Adjust speaker level

...

Sound components

Adjust speaker level

You hear a sound from every speaker one after another. But you can also select the speakers manually with the menu control buttons up/down. Set the volume for the respectively active speaker shown in blue so that you get approximately the same volume impression from all the speakers.

0dB 0dB

0dB

0dB

0dB

0dB

-12 dB 0 dB +12 dB


Distance to left front speaker

Select yes or no for Subwoofer.

If no subwoofer is connected, the front speakers additionally transmit the sound parts intended for the subwoofer as far as possible.

Proceed to Distance to left hand front speaker .

...

Sound components

Distance to left front speaker

Please enter the distance of the left front speaker from your listening position here.

4,0m

3,9m

2,0m

3,0m 4,0m

2,0m

0.1 m 4.0 m 10.0 m


Set the distance between the left front speaker and your listening position in 10 cm steps.

Measure the distances from your listening position to the front, surround, and centre speakers respectively. The digital audio decoder calculates delay times from this for the loudspeaker signals, so that these reach the listener simultaneously.

Proceed to the respective other speakers (right front speaker, left surround speaker, right surround speaker, centre speaker and subwoofer) and also

The selected speaker will be coloured blue.

After setting the distance to the subwoofer.

Proceed to Adjust speaker level.

Subwoofer phase

Adjust the volume for the speaker.

Proceed to next speaker or

select speakers manually.

For balanced audio reproduction all speakers should be set to the same volume level. A noise signal will be reproduced automatically on each speaker in succession. Adjust every speaker to equal perceived volume from your listening position. The selected speaker will be coloured blue.

After adjustment of the last speaker.

Proceed to Subwoofer phase .

...

Sound components

Subwoofer phase

Here you can reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Test both values in music reproduction and then select the one with which you get a better bass reproduction.

0° 180°


Switch a station or a DVD player playing music to music playback.

Test both values ( 0º and 180º ) and select the one with which you get a clearer bass reproduction from your listening position.



115

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier

Sound playback via ... - HiFi/AV amplifier

The sound components wizard permits configuration of different audio amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or digital) with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG, and stereo/PCM). See the user guide of the audio amplifier for more information.

For information on navigation within the wizard see chapter General information on menu operation .

Sound reproduction via ...




Select Connections ,

go to next column.

Select Sound components ,

Call sound components wizard.

Sound components

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...

Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your

TV sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if necessary).


TV speakers

Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)

HiFi/AV amplifier



Mark HiFi/AV amplifier or HiFi/AV amplifier or

TV speakers (switchable) ,


HiFi/AV amplifier

Select setting when an amplifier is connected and the TV speakers are not used.

HiFi/AV amplifier or

TV speakers

(switchable)

Select setting when an amplifier is connected and the TV speakers are used. In the sound mode selection the audio reproduction can then be switched between the amplifier and the TV speakers.

Type of sound transmission


...

Sound components

Type of sound transmission

Please select whether the TV sound signal should be transmitted to the

HiFi/AV amplifier by a digital (via the SPDIF OUT) or analog (via the AUDIO

OUT) signal.

digital analogue


Sound formats

...

Sound components

Sound formats

Please specify, what kind of sound formats can be processed by your

HiFi/AV amplifier and mark them by the button .

dts

MPEG

Dolby Digital


Amplifier

Type

Select sound formats which can be decoded with the digital amplifier (see operating manual of the used amplifier).

OK adopt sound formats.


...

Sound components

Amplifier Type

Please specify which amplifier type is connected.

Surround amplifier Stereo amplifier


Please select the amplifier type which is connected

(surround or stereo amplifier).


Select whether the sound is to be transmitted digitally or analogue to the the amplifier (see right hand column): digital : Proceed to Sound formats .

analogue : proceed to Type of amplifier .

116

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Antenna DVB

Here you can make settings for the DVB-T antenna and call the antenna wizard for the DVB-S antenna.

AV connection settings

In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV connection socket can be adapted.

Call Antenna DVB




Mark Connections ,

go to next column.

Mark Antenna DVB ,

go to next column.

Calling the connections menu




Mark Connections ,

go to next column.

Mark AV connecting settings ,

go to next column.

...

Antenna DVB Antenna

DVB-S

Antenna

DVB-T

The following antenna wizard guides you through all the

necessary settings relevant to your antenna system.

...


Signal type

Allow switching voltage

Please input whether a device is connected to the AV

socket and if so, which device.


call.


call.

Explanations of the setting options in the antenna DVB menu:

Antenna

DVB-S

Here the antenna wizard starts guiding you through all the settings relevant to the DVB-S antenna. The settings of the DVB-S antenna wizard are explained in the procedure of initial installation.

Antenna

DVB-T

Here you can set whether your DVB-T antenna needs a supply voltage.

Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply voltage on the antenna line. In this case, select

Supply voltage 5V and confirm with OK .

Otherwise, select No supply voltage and confirm also with OK .

Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings menu:

Device at connection

AV

Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is connected to the AV socket.

Signal type You set the signal type of the device connected to AV or AVS here. Normally, you should leave the setting to

Automatic VHS/SVHS ; otherwise select a suitable signal type. You can find out more from your dealer.

Allow switching voltage

If this function is activated, the video and audio of an external unit connected to the AV connector (not at

AVS) will immediately be reproduced on all TV broadcast sites when playback is started up, provided that the external unit supplies a switching voltage.

Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna

If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound interference then you should change the installation location and alignment of the antenna. Ask your dealer to tell you which channels are used to broadcast the DVB-T stations in your region.

A DVB-T station is received and selected.

Calling manual search (see chapter System settings , section Stations

– Manual TV/Radio scan ).

Due to the preset stations, the signal source is already selected as

DVB-T. Position and align the antenna so that maximum C/N values and levels are reached.

Search for DVB-T stations one after the other and compare values for

C/N and Level . Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained. The value for BER should be as low as possible.

Thereafter, perform an automatic search for all DVB-T stations.

117

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Connections

Digital Link Gaming mode

In the digital link menu you make further setting for comfortably linking external devices to the TV set.

Call Digital Recorder Link menu

For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications or even Karaoke machines are operated, we recommend you to activate the Gaming mode .

Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing the complex picture improving techniques.

This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.




Mark Connections ,

go to next column.

Mark Digital Link ,

OK call Digital Link.

...

Digital Link Digital Link

Remote

Shutdown

Thus you can permit (on) or prohibit (off) automatic

communication between the TV set and external devices connected to it (e.g. BluRay player) via the HDMI cable. One of its functions is to switch these devices on and off alternately.

Call Gaming mode menu




Mark Connections ,

go to next column.

Select Gaming mode ,

OK call.

Gaming mode

Set Gaming mode for inputs...

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

PC IN

AVS

AV

VIDEO Retour

Back

Mark/unmark with

OK


call.

For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications or even Karaoke machines are operated, we

recommend you to activate the "Gaming mode". Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing the complex, picture improving techniques. This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.

Explanations of the setting options in the Digital Link menu:

Digital Link

HD functionality

Herewith you can allow or forbid the automatic communication between the TV set and linked external devices (e.g., BluRay player). Among other things, it's role is that these devices switch mutually on and off.

Select connection,

OK Gaming mode for selected connection on/off.

You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming mode by the symbol after the connection name. A dice icon is shown in the extended station list behind the corresponding AV input when filtering on the AV list.

Remote switch on of the TV set

Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from Standby mode, if Digital Link

HD or Digital Link Plus capable devices connected to an HDMI or to AV inputs start playback or display a screen menu.

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -

Functionality

ט on has been selected.


2 HDMI 2

1 HDMI 1

2 HDMI 2

3 HDMI 3

4 HDMI 4

5 PC IN

6 AVS

7 AV

8 VIDEO

Back

Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button

You can select here whether the external Digital Link

HD device that is currently playing back should be automatically shut down as soon as you switch back to the TV or another AV channel.

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -

Functionality ט on has been selected.

A..Z

Search < AV list > < All stations >

118

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Extras

Extras

Extras contains additional functions and settings (e.g., Integrated features, Repeat initial installation, CA module settings).

Call Extras

DR+ Streaming

By switching off an accessible TV set ends access to its DR+ archive in the network.

You can, however, switch your TV set to an advanced standby mode to enable access to the DR+ archive even when the TV set is switched off (server function).




Mark Extras ,

go to next column.

Extras DR+

Streaming

Integrated features

Repeat initial installat i o

Reset to factory sett i n

By activating this function you can make your TV set

available to other LOEWE TVs that are set up for this for a specified period of time (can be configured using the digital recorder menu item "System settings -> Control -> more ->

DR+ -> DR+ Streaming -> DR+ standby").

Call DR+ Streaming




Mark Extras ,

go to next column.

Mark DR+ Streaming ,

OK confirm.

Extras DR+

Streaming

Integrated features

Repeat initial installat i o

Reset to factory sett i n

Your TV set will switch into a specific standbymode, whereby its DR+ archive will be accessible to other

LOEWE TVs that are set up for this. From this point, these devices can access your set 2 hour(s) over your home network.

Cancel


call.

Explanation of the subitems of Extras

DR+

Streaming

Switch off the TV set to be in an advanced standby mode (server function, see column on right hand side).

Integrated features

Call information on the integrated features of the TV set (see next page).

Repeat initial installation

You can repeat the Initial installation again at any time. You are guided through the various menus where i.a. an automatic TV/radio station search is automatically carried out.

Caution: All stored stations and all created personal lists will be deleted by this!

If a parental lock is activated, the access code must be entered before repeating initial installation.


Resetting various settings to their factory defaults

(see next page).

CA module

[Name]

Make settings for your CA modules.

This menu item appears only it at least one CA module is plugged in.

The exact designation of the menu item and available subitems depends on your CA module(s).

See chapter System settings , section Extras – CA module for further information.

The TV set will switch to the advanced standby mode.

The DR+ archive will now be accessible within the network for the period set in the DR+ Streaming -

Settings.

You find the setting of the period under System settings

ט

Control

ט more ...

ט

DR+

ט

DR+

Streaming

ט

DR+ Bereitschaft .

After the preset time has elapsed, the TV set switches to „normal“ standby mode.

119

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Extras

Integrated features

Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of the

TV set.

See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product designation.

Call Integrated features




Mark Extras ,

go to next column.

Mark Integrated features ,

OK call Integrated features (1 .


Here you can reset some of the settings to the factory default values.

Call Reset to factory settings




Mark Extras ,

go to next column.

Mark Reset to factory settings ,

OK call.

This resets the entire TV set to its factory settings.

...

Integrated features

Integrated features

Hardware Software Upgrade

Manufacturer LOEWE

Serial number 834

CI Plus PRODUCTION

Nicam

DD/DTS

PIP

Digital Recorder (DR+)

Back

Entire TV Set

Picture/ sound

Network

HDMI

Browser

Media data base

Wi-Fi module

Move content up and down with the cursor

Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of your TV set.

Select category (e.g. hardware, software, etc.),

If necessary, scroll content up/down.

Select a category you want to reset,

OK call.

Select Start reset ,

OK call.

Hardware Under the Hardware item, you can find the article and serial number of your TV set, the MAC address and the chassis type with all existing hardware components.

Software Under the item software, the current software version and the installed software features of your TV set are displayed.

Upgrade Under the item Upgrade you can find the installed software features with their respective status.

Activated: software feature is installed and can be used.

Not active: software feature is installed, but can not be used.

Entire TV Set This resets the entire TV set to factory defaults.

By resetting the entire TV set to the factory default state, all the settings you made and all stored stations will be deleted.

Thereafter, an initial installation of the TV set is carried out again (see chapter Initial installation ).

Picture/ sound

The current image and sound parameters of your TV set will be deleted and reset to the factory defaults.

Network The current network settings of your TV set will be deleted and reset to the factory defaults.

HDMI The HDMI setting is reset to the factory settings.

Browser The current browser settings of your TV set will be deleted and reset to the factory defaults.

All data stored in the course of use are deleted.

Media data base

Your current media database is deleted because the database is reinitialised. The information from the removable media (USB) and possibly the DR+ archive are then re-read.

The system then automatically performs a system reset.

(1 The screen graphic displayed is only an example. Depending on the device type, the available hardware/software components may be different.

120

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Extras

Common Interface (CI / CI Plus)

Common Interface, also called CI, is a interface in the TV set, into which a Conditional Access Module (CA module, see right column) can be plugged. The CA module and the smartcard from a corresponding Pay

TV supplier enable reception of encrypted stations.

CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface

Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as the programme provider permits this.

Conditional Access module (CA module)

In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access module

(CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of your

TV set.

The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the set of equipment supplied with the TV set. They are usually available from your dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning of the CA module.

The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts during initial operation.

Programme providers who use the CI Plus standard can assign different rights for their broadcast programmes.

For instance, the programme provider can restrict or completely prevent recording or later watching of an encoded programme.

If there are such regulations, these also apply to timeshift television accordingly.

A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an appropriate entry is displayed in the DR+ archive), later watching of the programme, however, is not possible at all or only for a limited period (e.g., 10 days).

A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the corresponding entry in the DR+ archive.

Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module

Push the Smart Card into the CA module as far as it will go. The side of the card with the gold chip on it should be pointing towards the thicker side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Note the direction of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.

CA module Smart Card

All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the broadcaster. The TV simply values the signalling set by the broadcaster as neutral.

Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying of protected programmes.

It could be necessary to enter the youth protection PIN of the CA module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by minors.

The Parental lock PIN can also be stored in the TV set. The access code of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.

Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot

Switch off TV set using the mains switch.

Remove the cover from the rear of the set.

Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two CI slots, ensuring that the contact side goes in first. Do not use force. Make sure the module is not twisted in the process. Push the CA module in as far as it will go.

Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules

From time to time, there will be new system software for your CA module software. There are two software update types.

Recommended update:

Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.

Forced update:

Information on an available update is displayed. The module does no longer decode until the update has been successfully implemented.

Finally, close the side cover.

Troubleshooting (CA module)

The following information can help, if problems should occur when running a CA module:

Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA-module from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds.

Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.

Should errors continue to occur, you will get further information resulting from the two-digit error code (only with CI Plus capable

CA modules). You will find the table with the error codes in chapter

Miscellaneous , section CA module error codes . If in doubt, contact your dealer.

121

Reference 55-85

User manual

System settings

Extras

Searching for scrambled stations

If no search for encrypted stations was performed during initial startup, this can be done later using the search wizard.




Mark Stations ,

go to next column.

Automatic scan TV+Radio ,

go to next column.

Select Change search settings ,

OK wizard guides you through the search settings.

Under scrambled stations you have to select yes .

Next select Start search/update ,

OK start updating the station list.

Station mapping

If two CA modules are both used for the decoding of stations, you decide here which station shall be decoded by which CA module.

The station mapping settings will only be taken into account, if two

CA modules are plugged.

This menu item is only available if under item Different rights was selected.

the mapping must be repeated.

Mark Station Mapping

call station list.

,

Smartcard rights

This statement refers explicitly to the CI slots of the TV set and

Select CA module for mapping.

the not to the modules plugged into it! When the modules are exchanged,

Mark station,

OK map station to the selected CA module / cancel mapping.

Calling CA module information

This menu is only available when a CA module is plugged in.




Mark Extras ,

go to next column.

Select desired CA module.

The indicated name depends on the inserted

CA module.

go to next column.

Select Module menu ,

OK call information.

The content of this menu depends on the provider of the CA module.

Storage the PIN for recordings

Store the programme provider PIN belonging to your CA module in order to decode CI plus programmes with parental lock for recording.

The menu option is available only if the plugged CA module supports storing the parental lock PIN.

Behind the assigned station is the number of the corresponding CI slot.

Or:

Mark Storage of PIN for recordings

call PIN entry box.

,

Mark the desired CA module in the headline.

Go to the PIN input line, use the numerical keys to enter the programme provider PIN.

Mark figure,

OK adopt figure to input line.

Smartcard rights

If two CA modules are used in parallel to decode stations, you specify here the rights of both smartcards.


Mark Adopt ,

OK save PIN.

Mark Smartcard rights

go to next column.

Select Same rights or Different rights .

If you select Same rights , the TV set assumes that both smartcards have the same rights and can be used for Dual Recording in parallel. In this case, the Station mapping function is not available.

When selecting Different rights , you can assign the stations to be decoded to the respective CA module.

Removing the CA module

Switch off TV set using the mains switch.

Remove the cover from the rear of the set.

Pull the CA module out of the CI slot.

Replace the cover.

122

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Devices to the HDMI connections

The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g.

DVD player, Blu-ray player, game console, camcorder, set-top box) via a single cable.

The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compression digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.

A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI socket. The devices are arranged in the AV list and in the station list below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.

Playback from the device

If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the

TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after starting the replay at the HDMI device.

The HDMI input can also be called up manually:

Call AV list .

AV list

Connecting the device

Switch off all devices before connecting them.

Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the

HDMI sockets of the TV set.

An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder) in the same way as shown in the figure.

If you use HDMI sources providing UHD content, they should be connected to the HDMI 4 UHD port.

Please note that not all signals may be represented on any HDMI socket (see chapter Technical Data , section Signals via AV (PC

IN) / HDMI )

TV set

6 AVS

Select HDMI socket.

With Digital Link HD -capable devices the device name may possibly appear in place of the connection name.

OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The best possible format for the picture is detected and set automatically.

Blu-ray player

HDMI

HDMI1

Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)

Renaming the HDMI port designation

The port designation of the HDMI jacks can be renamed manually.

Call AV list.

Select desired HDMI socket.

OK switch over.


Select Rename ,

OK call.

Enter new name (information on how to enter characters, see also section General information on operation , section Entering characters with on-screen keyboard ).

Select adopt,

OK New name for the HDMI jack is adopted.

123

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Digital Link HD

Operation of Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) enabled devices

The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) function allows Loewe television sets to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI connection of the

TV set to compatible HDMI devices (such as Loewe BluTechVison 3D).

You can therefore set up and use a concealed CEC capable HDMI device.

Thus, you can install a concealed CEC-enabled HDMI device and operate it easily.

You can select and operate the CEC-capable HDMI device in two different ways. On the one hand, by using a device key ( STB , VIDEO or AUDIO ) to switch to the operation of the HDMI device. On the other hand, by using the TV key to switch between HDMI device and the TV set.

Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device using the TV key

Switching the control via the TV key is only possible when no device key is assigned to the HDMI device you are using.

Call AV-List

Select a is connected.

Pressing TV

.

HDMI socket to which the HDMI device

for a longer period: switch remote control commands between HDMI and TV operation.

A message on the screen informs you about the currently selected mode.

Pressing briefly TV : Switch to TV mode (back to previous station).

Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device using a device key

Assign the HDMI CEC function (code 22 ) to the desired device key

( STB , VIDEO or AUDIO ). The assignment is described in chapter

External devices , section Setting the remote control – Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices .

Subsequently, the assignment of the HDMI device used to the preset device key will be done.

The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.

Press required button for 5 seconds.

A selection menu appears on the TV set.

Select HDMI device for key

Select HDMI device for key

No device

BluTech Vision

Back

Automatically switching off external devices

When returning to TV mode by briefly pressing the TV key the external device can be switched off.

You can find the settings in the System settings

ט

Connections

ט

Digital Link

ט

Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button .

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט on has been selected.

Remote switch on of the tv set

You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from

Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a

Digital Link HD -enabled device.

You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט

Digital Link ט Remote switch on of the tv set .

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality

ט on has been selected.

Cancel

Select required device from the list.

OK Accept.

The assignment of the device key and the assignment of the HDMI device are completed.

Switching off the TV set and connected devices (system standby)

The operation of the TV set must be enabled (see above).

Press the key long: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices connected to the HDMI ports will be switched off to standby (system standby).

Press the corresponding device key to switch to the operation of the HDMI device.

The remote control commands are routed from the TV set to the HDMI device.

Press the TV key to switch to the operation of the TV set.

If the Auto off function (see right column) is enabled, the HDMI device switches off.

124

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Devices on AV

The AV connection socket offers the possibility to connect e.g. a DVD player, video/DVD recorder or PC via two different adapters.

The required adapters (Scart or VGA adapter) are available as an accessory from your Loewe dealer (see chapter Accessories ).

The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual of the appropriate device.

Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory equipment to the AV socket here.

Connecting a DVD player to the TV set

A DVD player has been selected in the System settings ט AV connecting settings ט Device at connection AV .


Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket using the Scart adaptor (1 .

Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.

TV set

DVD player

AV

Remote TV switch on via Digital Link

You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from

Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a

Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV .

You can find the settings in the System settings

ט

Connections

ט

Digital Link

ט

Remote switch on of the TV set .

AV

Connection example of a DVD player

Playback from AV device

If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in the System settings ט Connections ט AV connecting settings ט

Allow switching voltage ט yes , the TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.

The AV input can also be called manually, however.

Call AV list .

AV list Note: If you press for at least two seconds to switch to the selected channel, the screen switches off and you will only hear the sound.

With the button

(green), you can switch the screen back on and off.

Select AV ,

OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

(1 Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories ).

125

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set

A DVD recorder has been selected in the System settings ט

Connections ט AV connecting settings ט Device at connection AV .


Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket using the Scart adaptor (1 . Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.

If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver

(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the aerial cable.

Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.

TV set

Connecting PC / Set-top box

You can connect a PC and thus use the TV screen as a monitor.

When connecting a PC or auxiliary device to the AV socket of the

TV set, adjust the output signal on your PC first so that it matches one of the signals in the table in chapter Technical data , section

Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI .


Connect the device to the TV set’s AV socket with a VGA cable and the VGA adaptor (1 .

Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the VGA adaptor via the jack plug socket.

TV set

PC

R

TV

AUDIO VGA

ANT IN

ANT OUT

DVD recorder

AV

ANT TV AV

AV

Connection example of a PC

Connection example of a DVD recorder

Playback from the device

Call AV list .


With the button


Playback from AV device

Call AV list .


With the button


OK

Select PC IN

switch over.

,

Adjusting the geometry of the PC picture

You can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase position of your PC. The settings you find under System settings

ט

Picture

ט more ...

ט

PC IN - Display .

Select AV ,

OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

Connecting devices with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)

External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally referred to as YUV; see also Glossary ) can be connected to the AV socket of the TV set using two adaptors. In addition to the VGA adaptor, a component VGA adaptor is required (available from your dealer).

The other units are connected as described in the left column.

(1 Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories ).

126

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) Connecting the speaker system (DAL)

You can easily connect a speaker system using the interface of your TV set.

AUDIO OUT You can easily connect a Loewe speaker system using the DIGITAL

AUDIO LINK interface (DAL) of your TV set.

Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.

The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the AUDIO OUT interface.

Connect the analogue audio output AUDIO OUT of the TV set with a stereo cinch/jack adapter cable to the Line IN audio inputs left/right of the subwoofer.

Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.

Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound

Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with maximum volume.

Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.

The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK interface. Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK port of the TV set.

Connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 socket of the Digital

Audiolink / Audiolink converter available as accessory. Connect the converter to the AUDIO LINK socket of the Subwoofer.

Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.

TV set

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK

TV set

Ethernet cable

(Cat. 5e or higher)

AUDIO OUT

Line IN left

Line IN right

Front left

Converter

Digital Audiolink / Audiolink

Front right

Center

Front left

Front right

Surround left

Surround right

Subwoofer

Subwoofer

Example of connecting a speaker system to your TV set

Example of connecting a speaker system to your TV set

Configuration of the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

When configuring the sound system in the sound components wizard enter if you want to use e.g. external front speakers or how the TV speaker is used (see chapter System settings , section Connections

– Sound components ).

Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound

Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with maximum volume.

Configuration of the speaker system (DAL)

When configuring the sound system in the Sound Component Wizard, you can eg enter the distances of each speaker corresponding to your listening position or adjust the level of each speaker individually.

This guarantees a natural spatial image of the sound (see chapter

System settings , section Connections – Sound components ).

127

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Connecting active loudspeakers

If you want to use active speakers, you can connect them with an adapter cable to the TV set.

Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the AUDIO LINK port of the TV set. Connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 socket of the Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter available as accessory. To the other end of the convertor you connect the adaptor cable Audiolink / 30cm / 9pin + 5.1 Out + Center In . Connect the cinch connectors of the adaptor cable to the cinch connectors of the speakers / subwoofer.

The cinch connections of the adaptor cable are labelled:

Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier

Connecting digital HiFi/AV amplifiers

Connect the digital audio output of the TV set SPDIF OUT to the digital audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:

Digital amplifier

DIGITAL IN

TV set

R for Front right

L for Front left

C for

SR for Surround right

SL for Surround left

SUB for Subwoofer SPDIF

OUT

The connections for the adaptor cable are pre-amplifier outputs. Therefore, only active loudspeakers / active subwoofers may be connected directly to the adaptor cable.

Front left Center

Subwoofer

Front right

Connect digital audio (pre) amplifier via audio return channel

(HDMI ARC)

Connect the HDMI1 socket of the TV using an HDMI cable with the

HDMI socket of the ARC-compatible audio (pre) amplifier (e.g.

Loewe

MediaVision 3D ). It is not necessary to log-in the amplifier separately with the TV set.

Surround left

Adapter cable

Converter

Digital Audiolink / Audiolink

CENTER

IN

Surround right

Connecting analogue HiFi/AV amplifiers

Use a stereo cinch/jack adaptor cable to connect the analogue audio output AUDIO OUT to the analogue audio input of the amplifier:

TV set

Analogue amplifier

AUDIO IN

L R

TV set AUDIO

OUT

Ethernet cable

(Cat. 5e or higher)

DIGITAL

AUDIO

LINK

Connection of active speakers to the TV set

Reproducing sound via an HiFi/AV amplifier

The sound reproduction via connected HiFi/AV amplifiers can be adjusted in the sound components wizard (see chapter System settings , section Connections – Sound components ).

Sound reproduction via the speaker system

The settings for sound reproduction via active speakers you find in the sound components wizard (see chapter System settings , section

Connections – Sound components ).

128

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Audio playback from external devices

Connect external AV devices (e.g., MP3 player) for sound reproduction to the AV inputs of the TV set.

Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)

Connect the output (jack socket) of the MP3 player via the VGA adaptor (1 to the AV socket of the TV set.

MP3 player TV set

IR-Link

The IR Link function allows the operation of concealed additional devices made by other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.

The remote control commands are passed from the IR receiver of the TV set via an externally connected infrared transmitter to the additional device.

The code system for remote control commands that control the additional device is RC5.

The control of the additional device is only possible when the TV set is switched on.

The infrared transmitter required is available as an accessory from your dealer (see chapter Accessories ).

AV

Connecting the infrared transmitter to the TV set

Insert the connector plug of the infrared transmitter into the RS-232C socket of the TV set.

Lay the cable of the infrared transmitter to the front area of the additional device used.

TV set

Connection example of an MP3 player

Select AV input

The selection of the AV input for a device at the AV socket

(connection as described above) is describe here as an example.

The procedure is similar to the selection of the other AV inputs.

Call up the AV list .

AV list

RS-232C

IR

Note: If you press for at least two seconds to switch to the selected channel, the screen switches off and you will only hear the sound.

With the button


Installing the infrared transmitter on the additional device

Find the right position on the desired device (optical connection between transmitter diode and IR receiver of the concealed device).

Remove the protective film from the adhesive surface of the infrared transmitter.

Attach the infrared transmitter at this position.

Mark desired AV source,

OK switch to AV source.

Start playback on the external device after selecting the AV input.

Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen is off)

To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player), the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.

Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the

TV set.

Switching off the screen is possible for the AV sources HDMI1, HDM2,

HDM3 and HDMI 4 UHD via the function list.

Call up the AV list .


OK press at least for two seconds.

Green key: Press the green key to switch the the screen on and off again.

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)

You can connect a home network system of different manufacturers

(e.g. AMX, Crestron) to your TV set via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.

As to the configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and for further information on the various home networking systems contact your dealer please.

(1 Adaptor available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories ).

129

Reference 55-85

User manual

External devices

Setting the remote control

Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set

Press the TV key , the LED above it will light for approx.

5 seconds.

Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder

Press the STB key , the LED above it will light for approx.

5 seconds.

Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices

You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The device keys STB – VIDEO – AUDIO can be reassigned to operate different Loewe devices.

Press the required device key and the STOP key simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED display flashes twice.

Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.

The corresponding LED indicator light flashes twice.

Using the remote control for a Loewe player

Press the VIDEO key , the LED above it will light for approx. 5 seconds.

Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set

Press the AUDIO key , the display above it will light for approx. 5 seconds.

As long as a key is pressed, the LED for the selected operating mode lights up ( TV – STB – VIDEO – AUDIO ). This allows you to check which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you press a button.

The factory setting of the keys is described above (see also table in right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).

Set unit for sound control function on the remote control

The keys for the sound control functions Volume ( 10 ) and Sound on/off

( 1 ) are programmed ex-factory to interact with the TV set. The unit to be operated can be modified.

The device must first be placed on one of the device key of the remote control (see right column) before the tone-control functions can be changed to the appropriate device.

Function

Audio

Functions

Press the TV key and the numerical key simultaneously for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the selected TV key flashes twice.

Buttons

TV + 3

TV + 4

TV + 5

TV + 6

Unit

Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D

Mediacenter

Loewe TV

Loewe TV with sound projector without system connection

Unit

Loewe ViewVision 8106 H

Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2

Loewe ViewVision DR+ DVB-T

Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT

Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive

Loewe Sound Projector

SetTopBox (STB) data base

Loewe TV - Digital radio

Loewe Mediacenter

Loewe BluTech Vision 3D

HDMI CEC mode

Loewe AudioVision

Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID

Apple IR codes

Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G)

Loewe Soundbox

Loewe SoundVision

Loewe AirSpeaker

Loewe Soundport

Loewe MediaVision 3D

Restore defaults

28

29

30

31

35

99

24

25

26

27

19

20

21

22

14

15

17

18

Code Factory setting

10

12

13

Audio

VIDEO

STB

The codes shown here only apply to direct operation of the auxiliary device device.

The available codes may vary depending on the status of the firmware in the remote control.

The factory setting of the device keys can vary depending on the firmware version of the remote control

130

Reference 55-85

User manual

Teaching the remote control


By means of key code 18 (Set-Top Box data base) your remote control

Assist may be taught for your Set-Top Box (e.g., decoder, external cable tuner). Thus, you spare yourself the use of several remote controls.

For the use of 2-digit key codes see chapter External devices , section Setting the remote control .

The following options are available for teach-in:

- Entering a 3-digit code number

- Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code

- Teaching individual keys

- Delete learned codes

In the following, the STB key is dealt with as an example since device code 18 is preset for this key ex-works. Code 18 may also be assigned to the VIDEO and AUDIO keys; the following description applies accordingly.

Teaching individual keys

All keys (except the TV , STB , VIDEO and AUDIO device keys as well as the V+/ keys and ) can be taught for the operation of units which are not contained in the integrated data base. The functions of the selected button are then completely or partially overwritten with the new codes.

Place the TV remote control and the remote control to be replaced in such a way that the infrared windows face each other at a distance of 1-5 cm (see sketch).

1-5 cm

Keep the STB and the red key simultaneously depressed for five seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up permanently.

Entering a 3-digit code number

The STB key can be programmed directly by means of a devicedependent 3-digit code. You find a list of these codes in chapter Code page at the end of this instruction manual.

Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.

The LED above the STB key flashes twice.

Enter the 3-digit code from the list. The LED above the

STB key lights up for 1 second.

OK end the programming mode. After a successful programming the LED flashes twice.

When entering a wrong code number, the LED lights up for 2 seconds. Do this programming once again.

Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code

The code of the currently programmed device on the STB key can be indicated by the remote control.

Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.


Press INFO key.

The LED above the STB key shows the programmed code by flashing. The figure "0" will be indicated by flashing 5 times.

Press key to be taught on the TV remote control.

The LED above the STB key flashes.

On the original remote control press the button which is to be taught.

The LED above the selected STB key flashes twice.

If the code is not correctly recognised, the LED above the STB key flashes ten times. Then repeat your entry on the original remote control. If necessary correct the allocation of the two remote controls. Continue with the other buttons as described above.

To end the teaching mode, press the STB key again.

After 10 seconds without an entry the teaching mode is automatically terminated.

It is possible that not all remote control codes can be taught.

You can make a note of the functions, which you have allocated to the keys, on the notes pages at the end of this instruction manual.

131

Reference 55-85

User manual


Deleting individual key functions

You can delete the taught function of an individual button.

Press STB and green key simultaneously for five seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up permanently.

Press key to be deleted on the TV remote control.


Continue with the deletion of other buttons as described above.

To end the deletion mode, press the STB key again.

The LED above the STB key flashes once.

Deleting all functions of the key for a device

You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the STB key.

Press STB and yellow key simultaneously for five seconds. The LED above the STB key flashes twice.

Deleting all functions of the keys for all devices

You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the TV, STB,

VIDEO or AUDIO buttons.

Press STB and blue key simultaneously for five seconds. The LEDs above the keys for the devices flash twice.

132

Reference 55-85

User manual

Loewe Apps

Smart tv2move App

With the Loewe Smart tv2move app your tablet becomes a secondary

TV set. Due to the Smart tv2move app you can completely independent of your TV set zap on your tablet through the TV channels, schedule recordings or view archive recordings from the hard disk recorder DR+.

To do so, you can freely move around. Regardless of whether you are just in the bedroom, in the kitchen or on the terrace - as long as you are connected to your home network via Wi-Fi.

You can download the Loewe Smart tv2move app for free in Playstore or iTunes and install it on your tablet.

Explanation of the most important App symbols:

On Air: Here you see a list of the currently running programmes of your station list.

Detailed info: By tapping the info icon of the respective programme in the overview you can see detailed information on the programme.

Timer record: Using the timer record icon in the Detailed info you can programme a timer recording of the selected programme on the TV set.

Preconditions

Suitable for tablets as of Android 4.1.1 and Apple iOS 8.

For Android, we recommend to use the respectively latest generation equipment (Nexus 7, Nexus 10, Samsung Galaxy Tab

10.1, Samsung Galaxy Tab 8.0, Sony Xperia Z).

For iOS, at least the iPad of generation 3 or newer should be used.

With other tablets, a jitter may occur due to an insufficiently fast

CPU in case of both SD and HD streams.

The Smart tv2move app is suitable for freely receivable stations.

Encrypted TV stations or recordings may not be transferred in the network (e.g. encrypted channels or recordings of HD Plus or Sky customers).

A personal station list must exist. If not, a personal station list must be created under:

System Settings ט Stations ט Station lists TV ט New personal list .

Sharing DR+ archive with other devices:



Make sure that your tablet and the Loewe TV are registered on the same logical network.

System Settings ט Multimedia / Network ט Network settings .

Select whether the TV device should be connected to the Internet using a LAN (cable) or Wi-Fi (wireless) connection.

We recommend to connect the TV set to the router/switch via LAN.

When you connect via Wi-Fi or Powerline, you can not always be sure that a sufficiently large data rate is available for transmission.

Send to TV: Using the Send to TV icon in the Detailed Info you can view the currently selected programme on your TV set.

Play on Smart Device: Using the Play on Smart Device icon in the Detailed info you can view the currently selected programme on your tablet.

EPG: You can view the Electronic Programme Guide of your station list independently of the TV set. This overview gives you detailed infos on the individual programmes, you can programme timer recordings and watch the programmes on the TV or tablet.

Time: Via the icon Time you jump to the currently running programme in the EPG overview.

Date: Via the Date icon you select the date that is shown in the EPG overview.

Video: Here you can call the overview of the DR+ archive entries on your tablet and watch them on the TV set or tablet.

Devices: Here, all TV sets are listed which are compatible with the home network.

Connect TV set – App

Start the Loewe App.

The application will automatically search for compatible TV sets in the home network. A list of Loewe TVs will appear in the home network.

The name of the TV set can be defined under System Settings

ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming ט DR+ device name . Default setting : Remote TV

Simply tap the desired list entry in order to select the TV set. You can even choose a personal station list then.

After selecting the station list the loading process of all data starts

(station list, station information and programme data). This may take several minutes. Once all of the data has been loaded, the app is fully ready for use.

133

Reference 55-85

User manual

Loewe Apps

Smart Assist App

Your favourite radio stations or programmes recorded with DR+ can be conveniently saved to the home screen of the Smart Assist app to access them quickly and easily within your home network.

Or scroll on your smartphone in the electronic programme guide

(EPG) and inform yourself about the duration and content of the current programme. Click on the desired content and it will be shown on your Loewe Smart TV.

Using Loewe Mobile Recording you can now programme your desired

TV programmes easily and comfortably on the move in conjunction with the Loewe Assist Smart app. All you need is an Internet-enabled smartphone with the Loewe Smart Assist app.

When using the Loewe Assist Smart app, the smartphone can be used as a remote control unit for the TV set.

You can download the Loewe Smart Assist app for free in Playstore or iTunes and install it on your tablet/smartphone.

Explanation of the most important App symbols:

Media Category: Here you can select various media sources.

On Air: Here you see a list of the currently running programmes of your station list. By tapping the programme you can get detailed information on the programme.

EPG: You can view the Electronic Programme Guide of your station list independently of the TV set. This overview gives you detailed infos on the individual programmes, you can programme timer recordings and watch the programmes on the TV set.

Time/Date: Via the Time / Date icons you select the period of time for the EPG overview.

Preconditions

Suitable for tablets and smartphones as of Android 4.1.1 and Apple iOS 8.

A personal station list must exist. If not, a personal station list must be created under:

System Settings

ט

Stations

ט

Station lists TV

ט

New personal list .

Sharing DR+ archive with other devices:



Make sure that your tablet and the Loewe TV are registered on the same logical network.

System Settings

ט

Multimedia / Network

ט

Network settings .

Select whether the TV device should be connected to the Internet using a LAN (cable) or Wi-Fi (wireless) connection.

We recommend to connect the TV set to the router/switch via LAN.

When you connect via Wi-Fi or Powerline, you can not always be sure that a sufficiently large data rate is available for transmission.

Connect TV set – App

Start the Loewe App.

The application will automatically search for compatible TV sets in the home network. A list of Loewe TVs will appear in the home network.

The name of the TV set can be defined under System Settings

ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming ט DR+ device name . Default setting : Remote TV

Simply tap the desired list entry in order to select the TV set. You can even choose a personal station list then.

After selecting the station list the loading process of all data starts

(station list, station information and programme data). This may take several minutes. Once all of the data has been loaded, the app is fully ready for use.

Video: Here you can call the overview of the DR+ archive entries on your tablet and watch the programmes stored in the archive on the TV set.

Remote control. Herewith you access a remote control to allow you to easily operate your TV set.

Send to TV: Using the Send to TV icon you can watch the currently selected programme in the EPG or the DR+ archive entry on your TV set.

Timer record: Using the timer record icon in the Detailed info you can programme a timer recording of the selected programme on the TV set.

If your smartphone is no longer in the same network as the TV set, the Timer Programming is done automatically via mobile recording if this function is enabled and set up (see chapter TV, section Digital Recorder - Mobile

Recording ).

Add to my favourites: allows you to add the currently selected entry (programme, archive entry, etc.) to your favourites under the item Home.

Favourite: The selected entry already exists as a favourite under the item Home.

Category Home: Under the item Home you will find all your personal favourites.

Category Devices: Here, all TV sets are listed which are compatible with the home network.

134

Reference 55-85

User manual

Troubleshooting

Problem

The TV set switches off automatically.

Possible cause Remedy / Instructions

The automatic shutdown switches off the

TV set to save energy after 4 hours of inactivity as soon as at least one signal input group is set up in the energy efficient mode

Home Mode .

Using automatic shutdown is recommended for the purposes of energy saving and safety.

All menus are displayed in the wrong language .

The menu language was set incorrectly.

General problems when connecting devices via an AV input .

external The Signal type is set incorrectly.

Set the menu language:

Press HOME key. Call last menu item

(bottom left). Mark the fourth item from above in the following list and move to next column to the right. Call first list item with OK . Select the language and confirm it with OK .

Set the correct signal type ( System settings

ט Connections ט AV connection settings

ט Signal type ).

If AV standard or Signal type is set to

“ Automatic ” then this can lead to false detections with non-standard signals. In this case standard and signal must be set according to the information in the operating manual of the external device.

With Teletext various characters are displayed incorrectly.

The wrong character set has been set in the

System settings .

Set the correct character set: System settings ט Control ט more ... ט Standard

Teletext ט Character set ט Standard or select the appropriate character set.

Errors occurred when running a CA module.

Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.

No sound via the external digital audio amplifier .

a) The external digital audio amplifier does not support the selected sound format

(Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG).

b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier are not connected with each other.

a) Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the sound selection. For DVB stations switch

Language/Sound b) Connect SPDIF OUT from the TV set to a digital input of the external digital audio amplifier and select the appropriate input to this.

A programmed recording was not made.

The provider deleted the programme from the EPG data, for example due to a programme change.

The station from which the recording was made does not support automatic time control ( Accurate Recording ).

Only the broadcasting organisations are responsible for transmitting data for the automatic time control . The availability of the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.

There is no start or end of a programmed recording although the automatic time control ( Accurate Recording ) was used.

The transmission time of the program was delayed and the channel from which the recording was made has not updated the data.

Only the broadcasting organisations are responsible for transmitting data for the automatic time control . The availability of the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.

No IP address will be issued to your TV set in spite of automatic IP configuration.

No DHCP server is working on your network.

Set up a DHCP server.

Assign the IP addresses for the TV set manually .

135

Reference 55-85

User manual

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Remedy / Instructions

Despite video or music file being played back, no sound can be heard.

a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has been turned down too much.

b) An audio device that does not exist or that is not connected, is registered under

System settings ט Connections ט

Sound components (e.g., HiFi/AV amplifier ).

a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+ key on the remote control for a longer time. This will also cancel any mute setting.

b) Connect the audio device and switch it on.

In the Sound components wizard change back to TV speakers .

A media file that is displayed can not be played back.

The format of the file is not supported (see also limitations in chapter Technical data , section

Media – File formats supported .

No remedy.

Characters received in the WLAN code of the wireless router cannot be entered for the network configuration at the TV set.

The device does not support all special characters.

Change the WLAN key of the router.

When searching for wireless routers, no device is found.

The router is not ready for wireless communication.

Check your wireless router.

Try to make the connection again a few minutes later.

136

Reference 55-85

User manual

Technical Data

Technical data

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type: Reference 85 Reference 75 Reference 55

Part number:

EU energy efficiency class:

Screen diagonal:

54435xxx 54434xxx 54433xxx see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe

216 cm / 85 inch 189 cm / 75 inch 140 cm / 55 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):

Power consumption On-Mode (home) (1 :

Annual energy consumption (1 :

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

515 W see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe

0,40 W

0 W

350 W

0,40 W

0 W

205 W

0,38 W

0 W

Resolution / Picture format:

Display technology:

Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical):

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):

Weight without stand (approximate):

Ambient temperature:

Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9

LCD with Direct-LED-Backlight

178° / 178°

194,0 x 115,5 x 8,9 cm

96,5 kg

5° C – 35° C

171,7 x 102,9 x 8,9 cm

75,2 kg

LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight

125,9 x 76,6 x 6,1 cm

36,7 kg

Relative humidity (non-condensing):

Air pressure:

Chassis designation:

20 – 80%

800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

SL 320

Power supply:

Tuner:

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite: terr./cable:

Satellite:

220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

6000 Station storage locations incl. AV and radio:

TV standards:

Colour standards: analogue: digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C/C2, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 30 Hz)

SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound standards:

Audio output power (sine / music): analogue (FM): analogue (NICAM): digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby

Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11, DTS, DTS HD

2 x 30W / 2 x 60W

Acoustic speaker concept:

Teletext:

Page memory:

Soundbar

TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

2000

LAN:

WLAN:

Bluetooth:

Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

Standards supported:

Frequency range used:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Home networking standard:

Bluetooth protocols:

Wireless transmission 2.4 GHz, 10 m transmission range

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported (2 : Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, AC3, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AC3), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263, MP3,

AAC LC), MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio,

AC3), VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, AC3)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

(1 The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the

(2 way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

137

Reference 55-85

User manual

Technical Data

1080p30

1080p50

1080p60

VGA

SVGA

XGA

WXGA

SXGA

480i60

576i50

480p60

576p50

720p50

720p60

1080i50

1080i60

1080p24

1080p25

Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI

The following table shows the compatible signals which may be represented by your TV set using the appropriate adapter at the AV connection ( PC IN ) or at the HDMI connections ( HDMI1 , HDMI2 ,

HDMI3 , HDMI 4 UHD ).

Set the output signal on your device so that it matches one of the signals in the table.

Signal input groups

In your TV set the signals are sorted in various signal input groups according to their source. In addition to the source, the type of signal is also distinguished.

For each signal input group, there are individual values for the picture settings.

Please note that not all signals may be represented at every HDMI socket or at AV (PC IN).

Format Connection

Signal group name

Signal source/Signal type

SD Analog cable analogue, interfaces AV, AVS, PC IN (1 (SD)

SD Digital DVB (SD), DR+ (SD), MPEG-Encoder

1920 x 1080p

1920 x 1080p

1920 x 1080p

640 x 480

800 x 600

1024 x 768

1360 x 768

1280 x 1024

3840 x 2160p

3840 x 2160p

3840 x 2160p

3840 x 2160p

3840 x 2160p

Horizontal x Vertical

720 x 480i

720 x 576i

720 x 480p

720 x 576p

1280 x 720p

1280 x 720p

1920 x 1080i

1920 x 1080i

1920 x 1080p

1920 x 1080p

60Hz

24Hz

25Hz

30Hz

50Hz

60Hz

30Hz

50Hz

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

Frame frequency

60Hz

50Hz

60Hz

50Hz

50Hz

60Hz

50Hz

60Hz

24Hz

25Hz

PC IN, HDMI 1-3

PC IN, HDMI 1-3

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-4

PC IN, HDMI 1-3

PC IN, HDMI 1-3

HDMI 1-3

PC IN, HDMI 1-3

HDMI 1-4

HDMI 1-4

HDMI 1-4

HDMI 4

HDMI 4

SD Media

Player full screen display of SD videos via USB, Network,

VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)

SD HDMI Playback of SD video via HDMI, e.g., DVD player

HD Analog PC IN (1 (HD)

HD Digital DVB (HD), DR+ (HD)

HD Media

Player full screen display of HD videos via USB, Network,

VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)

HD HDMI Playback of HD videos via HDMI, e.g., Blu-Ray player

3D HD 3D playback of HD videos (analogue or digital)

3D SD 3D playback of SD videos (analogue or digital)

3D Media

Player full screen display of 3D videos (SD/HD) via USB,

Network, VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)

3D HDMI Playback of 3D videos via HDMI, e.g., 3D Blu-Ray player

Photo Player Playback of Photos via USB and network

Browser Display of Web sites in the Browser (incl. Media apps)

VGA PC IN (1 (PC) or HDMI (PC)

(1 with VGA adaptor on AV connection.

138

Reference 55-85

User manual

Accessories

Accessories

The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.

Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables

Mounting options:

A variety of options for mounting your TV set on the floor, table, and wall are available.

An overview of the available placement options can be found in the chapter accessories , section placement options .

USB extension (part no. 70167080):

To ensure the accessibility of the USB connections or to be able to insert USB sticks with a large housing, a USB extension can be connected to the TV set. You can purchase the USB extension via your

Loewe dealer.

Color Kits:

By replacing the speaker grill you can specifically customize your

Reference TV set. The Colour Kits are available in different colours.

Converter Digital Audiolink/Audiolink (part no. 71600080):

The digital Audiolink/Audiolink convertor allows you to connect your

TV set to audio devices with a 25-pole AUDIO LINK socket.

To connect the convertor you require additionally an Ethernet cable with RJ45 plugs, category 5e or higher with a length of at least 1m and maximum 15m.

Loewe Sound systems:

You can perfectly combine your TV set with the Loewe sound components. Numerous options for loudspeaker combinations can be realised with floor-standing loudspeakers, satellite loudspeakers and a subwoofer.

Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / Scart (part no. 72150080) set of 3:

The Loewe scart adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding an AV socket to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders.

Loewe 3D Blu-ray player:

With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision 3D you’re fully kitted out to watch Blu-ray discs with 2D and 3D material. With the Loewe system integration you control BluTech Vision 3D and your Loewe TV set simultaneously using the Assist remote control.

Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / VGA (part no. 72155080) set of 3:

The VGA adaptor enables the connection of a PC monitor or a Settop box.

Additionally to the video inputs, the adaptor for VGA is equipped with a 3.5 mm stereo jack socket for analogue sound.

Loewe MediaVision 3D:

Loewe MediaVision 3D is partly an audio system: It plays your favourite sound via the integrated iPod/iPhone dock and automatically identifies songs or film music with the MusicID function. Loewe MediaVision 3D is also a home cinema system, ensuring a perfect all-round audio visual experience - thanks to the fast and precise Full-HD 3D

Blu-ray drive and a 5.1 decoder. Not least, Loewe MediaVision 3D is a colourful feast for the eyes: because it can be beautifully customised by individual intarsia.

Converter RJ12 / 5m / IR (part no. 70533082) set of 3:

Converter of RJ12 to an IR transmitter to operate concealed additional devices of other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.

Adapter RJ12 / 2,5m / RS232 (part no. 70499082) set of 3:

RJ12 to 9-pin Sub-D connector adaptor cable for the integration of the TV set in professional home automation systems, such as GIRA,

CRESTRON, AMX.

Loewe Assist Easy:

The reduced focused design of Loewe Assist Easy remote control guarantees survey at first sight, nevertheless all important functions are controllable with one hand. Therefore it is the optimal control centre of the new user interface Loewe Assist Media. As a multifunctional remote control it is able to control further Loewe products in addition.

Loewe 3D glasses (part. no. 71133082):

The Loewe 3D shutter Active 3D Glasses give you clear 3D enjoyment and are compatible with all Loewe 3D flat screen TVs.

Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts M6x32 (part. no. 90473988):

Mounting a Loewe flatscreen TV set (1 to a holder according to the

VESA standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts to prevent damage to the TV set.

See chapter Accessories , section VESA standard for further information..

Subject to availability.


139

Reference 55-85

User manual

Accessories

Mounting options

Wall Mount Slim/Vesa Size 400

Reference 55: 71361T20

Wall Mount Reference 75/85 /

Wall Mount WM 67

Reference 85: 72255W00



Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

Reference 55: 71363B00

(1

Table Stand Reference 55


Table Stand Art 55


Floor Stand Reference 75/85 MU /

Floor Stand Reference 55 MU




Screen Lift Plus


(1

Loewe Rack TS

Different versions, sizes and colours available to match Loewe TV, sound system and equipment

(1 Only in conjunction with appropriate adaptor to be ordered separately.

(2 Only in conjunction with VESA Size 400 adapter.

140

Reference 55-85

User manual

Accessories

VESA standard

Instructions on using third-party mounting options according to the VESA standard (1

Loewe flat screen TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. When using third-party mounting options according to the VESA standard, the manufacturer‘s instructions on the mounting options must be observed.

Loewe accepts no liability for the use of mounting options from other manufacturers.

On the rear wall of the TV set, there are four points of screw connections to receive the VESA adapter bolts.

Mounting a Loewe flat screen TV set to a holder according to the VESA standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe VESA adaptor bolts.

Otherwise, the TV set may be damaged.

Screw the Loewe VESA adapter bolts with a torque of approx. 4 Nm into the screwing points of the TV rear panel (see Fig. 1).

1

First, possibly existing screws in the four screwing points must be removed.

2

D

The Loewe VESA adaptor bolts are used to ensure stability and the necessary minimum distance of 5 mm between rear wall of the TV set and VESA holder (see Fig. 2). The VESA holder must not rest on the rear panel.

When mounting the TV set, always check that all four Loewe VESA adaptor bolts are used. For each mounting point, only one VESA adapter bolt may be used. It is inadmissible to screw several VESA adapter bolts or extend individual adapter bolts.

Measure the hole distance between the screwing points of your TV set. A hole distance of 400 x 400 mm on the rear of the TV set means

VESA 400 standard.

Thus, a suitable mount bracket must also correspond to the VESA 400 standard. If the VESA standard of your TV set fits the standard of the desired bracket, the bracket has also to be approved for the weight and size of the TV set (for weight and TV set size refer to chapter

Technical Data ).

Loewe is not responsible for the permissible load-carrying capacity and the professional fixing of the holder.

Please observe additionally and definitely the points described in the chapter on safety instructions.

If you use a Vesa mounting options from other manufacturers, you can order the Vesa adapter bolts M6x32 (No. 90473.988) at your authorized dealer of Loewe.


141

Reference 55-85

User manual

Environment / Legal information

Environment Legal information

Environmental protection

Power consumption

Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see chapter Technical data ). If you want to save even more energy then switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot be carried out by the TV set.

The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when you unplug the mains cable.

The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the energy efficiency preset in the initial installation or on the setting in the system settings.

If you activate the automatic dimming, your TV picture will adapt to the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the

TV set.

If the TV set is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme change, etc.) the TV set will automatically switch to standby mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.

Licences

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro

Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol, DTS-HD, and the DTS-HD logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This set contains a software which is partly based on the work of the

Independent JPEG Group.

Cardboard box and packaging

You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, we have paid a fee to a commissioned recycler to pick up the packaging from the dealer in accordance with national legislation.

The device

The EU directive 2002/96/EG regulates the proper way to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic devices. Old electronic appliances must therefore be disposed of separately. Never dispose of this device in normal domestic waste !

You can hand in your old unit free of charge at identified collection points or to your dealer if you buy a similar new unit. Other details about re-acceptance (also for non-EU countries) are available from your local municipal administration.

Batteries

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).

This software is provided by the OpenSSL project “as is“ and any expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL project or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

([email protected]).

This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.

com).

The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not contain any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or mercury.

In accordance with the Battery Directive, used batteries should no longer be disposed of in the domestic waste . Dispose of your batteries at no charge in the collection containers which are set up for this purpose in retail stores.

This product contains software which was developed by third parties and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL) and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General

Public License or optionally every later version which is published by the Free Software Foundation.

The publication of this programme by Loewe is carried out WITHOUT

ANY GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT, particularly without an implicit guarantee concerning MARKET MATURITY or the USABILITY FOR A

SPECIFIC PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public

License. You can obtain the software via the Loewe customer service department.

The GNU General Public License can be downloaded from: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

142

Reference 55-85

User manual

Miscellaneous

Screen cleaning

The front screen attached to your TV set is designed so that no condensate water forms at temperature fluctuations on the screen. For this purpose, it is necessary that the front plate is not sealed air-tight. It is therefore possible that particulate matter will be deposited on the rear side of the screen or on the panel of the TV set.

It is possible to remove the front screen of your TV set and to clean it. You can remove and clean the front screen yourself. Loewe accepts no liability for any damage caused by disassembly/assembly and cleaning of the front screen or improper handling.

Necessary means: Reference 55: two people, Torx TX20, prepared support surface for the screen (min 126 x 77 cm).

Reference 75/85: three people, Torx TX20, two screen suckers (double suckers).

You also have the possibility that the cleaning is done by your dealer for a charge.

Disassembly and cleaning of the screen (Reference 55)

Prior to the disassembly of the screen, switch the TV set off with the mains switch and pull out the mains plug from the socket. Then take off the cable covers from the rear wall of TV set.

On the rear of TV set, remove the two inner screws (A) M4x20 / TX20 and the two outer screws (B) M4x18 / TX20 at the marked points.

The screen can now be removed. It is important that this is done by two persons. Grasp into the two openings at the bottom of the front screen. Make sure that you do not damage the speakers behind. Grasp the screen additionally on its upper edge.

Push the screen carefully upwards out of its locking mechanism (1).

Then, pull the screen gently to the front away from the device (2).

(1)

B A A B

When using the mounting option wall bracket WM 67, you must carefully pull the bottom of the TV set from the wall or take it away from the wall to remove the four screws on the rear side of the device using the right tools. Make sure that you do not damage the TV set and the wall behind with the tool. Further disassembly of the screen is done from the front side of the device.

The fabric-covered front panel (C) can now be removed. The front panel is held in place by magnets. When removing the panel make sure that you do not damage or contaminate the fabric covering. Do not use sharp and pointed objects.

C

(2)

Put the screen carefully down with its entire surface lying flat on soft material. Use a blanket or the fleece from the packing material as an underlay.

Clean the screen and the panel with a moist, soft, clean and colourneutral cloth only, without any aggressive or scouring cleaning agents.

143

Reference 55-85

User manual

Miscellaneous

Assembly of the screen (Reference 55)

At the left and right of the screen there are three fixing points into which the screen must be fit. It is important that the assembly of the screen is done by two persons.

Remove the front panel (C) and insert the two centre mounting bolts into the two openings.

Subsequently, the two sides of the front panel are pressed down from the middle outwards. Insert the two outer mounting bolts into the two openings.

Position the screen centrally above the panel of the TV set. Be careful not to damage the panel and the surrounding aluminium profile on the

TV set. Slide the screen into the fixing points (1) and push the screen slowly into the locking mechanism downwards (2).

C

The front panel is held in place by magnets. Push the front panel upwards until it is flush with the front screen. Pay attention to the uniform lateral alignment (centring).

(1)

On the rear side of the device, screw the two inner screws (A) M4x20

TX20 and the two outer screws (B) M4x18 TX20 into the marked points. Hand tighten the screws.

Reconnect all the cables.

(2)

B A A B

144

Reference 55-85

User manual

Miscellaneous

Disassembly and cleaning of the screen (Reference 75/85)

Prior to the disassembly of the screen, switch the TV set off with the mains switch and pull out the mains plug from the socket. Then take off the two cable covers from the rear wall of TV set.

On the rear of TV set, remove the two screws (A) M4x35 / TX20 at the marked points.

After removing the front panel (B), remove the four screws (D) M4x6

/ TX20 on the front of TV set, at the marked points.

D D D D

The screen can now be removed. It is important that this is done by at least two persons. Use for this purpose special pane suckers (available in specialised stores) that you attach to the front screen.

Push the screen carefully upwards out of its locking mechanism (1).

Then, pull the screen gently to the front away from the device (2).

Fix the screen additionally on its upper edge.

A A

When using the wall bracket mounting option (Wall Mount Reference

75/85) you must remove the two screws on the rear panel with a matching L-key TX20. Make sure that you do not damage the TV set and the wall behind with the tool. Further disassembly of the screen is done from the front side of the device.

The fabric-covered front panel (B) can now be removed.

When removing the panel make sure that you do not damage or contaminate the fabric covering. Do not use sharp and pointed objects.

Avoid excessive bending please to prevent breaking of the front panel.

The front panel is held at the right and left by a bayonet lock (C). Pull the middle part of front panel (B) carefully away from the TV set. The two bayonet locks on the right and left sides will be unlocked. Thus, one side of the front panel will be separated from the holder, the other side can then be threaded out.

C

(1) (1)

C

(2)

(3)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

B

C (1) Front panel (B) on the TV set, bayonet locks (C) interlocked

C (2) Front panel (B) on the TV set, bayonet locks (C) unlocked

C (3) Front panel (B) removed

Under no circumstances, lay down the screen with its entire front surface. Place the screen carefully in an upright position on the bottom edge and secure the screen against falling by two people.

A third person may then clean the screen. Clean the screen and the panel with a moist, soft, clean and colour-neutral cloth only, without any aggressive or scouring cleaning agents.

145

Reference 55-85

User manual

Miscellaneous

Assembly of the screen (Reference 75/85)

At the left and right of the screen there are three fixing points into which the screen must be fit. It is important that the assembly of the screen is done by at least two persons, preferably by three persons.

Screw in the four fastening screws (D) M4x20 / TX20 at the marked points on the front of the TV set. Hand tighten the screws.

Position the screen centrally above the panel of the TV set. Be careful not to damage the panel and the surrounding aluminium profile on the

TV set.

Slide the screen into the fixing points (1) and push the screen slowly into the locking mechanism downwards (2). If the clearance is equal at the side and on top, the screen has been fitted correctly.

D D D D

(1) Take the front panel (B) and insert its right side into the recess of the bayonet lock.

(2) Pull the middle part of front panel (B) a little bit away from the TV set. Then thread the left side of the front panel into the bayonet lock.

(3) Now lead the middle of the front panel to the TV set and thus the two mounting bolts in the two openings.

The front panel is centred by itself.

B

(1)

(1)

B

B

(2)

(3)

On the rear of TV set, screw in the two screws (A) M4x35 / TX20 at the marked points. Hand tighten the screws.

Reconnect the power cord and attach the cable cover again.

(2)

A A

146

Reference 55-85

User manual

Miscellaneous

CA module error codes

In case of problems with a CA module, error codes are displayed by TV set. The following table from the CI specification shows the meaning of the error codes.

Error

Code +

Error condition Error detected by

Host action CI Plus Module action Comments

00

01

02

03

04

N/A

CICAM

CICAM

CICAM/Host

CICAM/Host

None None

CICAM goes to pass - through mode (1 .

- CICAM goes to pass-through mode (1 .

- a revocation notification message is displayed.

- If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise switches to DVB CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

The service operator and CAS may choose under what conditions to descramble when operating in DVB

CI mode.

- If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise switches to DVB CI mode


The service operator and CAS may choose under what conditions to descramble when operating in DVB

CI mode.

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

CICAM

CICAM

None

None

Recommended:

- CICAM retries the download 2 times


Recommended:



CICAM None Recommended:



CICAM None CICAM goes to pass - through mode

CICAM/Host Host stops the CICAM.

CICAM goes to pass - through mode





12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22 CICAM Requires

Update



Host

Host

Host stops the CICAM.

Host goes to DVB-CI mode (2 .

None

None

Host

CICAM

CICAM

CICAM

CICAM

CICAM

CICAM

CICAM

23-127 Reserved for CI

Plus

CICAM

128-255 Private Use for

Service Operator

CICAM

Host stops the CICAM.

None

None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode


None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode (3


None

None

None

None

None

None

- CICAM goes to pass- through mode


- CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode (3






- CICAM goes to pass- through mode



None - a response error notification message is displayed.

(1 The CICAM relays the transport stream unaltered and does not descramble any services (CI Plus or DVB).

(2 The Host behaves like a DVB - CI compliant Host.

(3 The CICAM descrambles only services that require no CI Plus prote ction (DVB-CI fallback mode).

147

Reference 55-85

User manual

Glossary

0-9

24p motion picture display: Movies released on Blu-ray Disc support the 24p motion picture display. The Blu-ray player transfers the original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The

DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.

A

Accurate Recording: See Automatic time control .

Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.

Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification which can improve the reception in areas with a poor coverage.

ARC: Abbreviation for Audio Return Channel .

Audio Return Channel: The audio return channel which was introduced with the HDMI Standard 1.4 is used when an audio system with audio

(pre) amplifier, e.g. Loewe MediaVision 3D, is connected to a TV set via

HDMI. The digital audio signal of the TV set (e.g. the sound of the current TV program) can be transferred to the audio amplifier via the audio return channel of the HDMI cable. Thus the same cable which is normally responsible for transferring image data from a connected media player to the TV set transfers the audio data in the opposite direction. In this way, the audio return channel makes the cinch cable, which has previously been required in addition to the HDMI cable, redundant.

Automatic time control: Also called Accurate Recording . Similar to

VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate from the data programmed in the timer data, the running time of the recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not supported by all DVB stations.

AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.

AV sources: Audio/Video source.

AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file format developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container format).

B

Band: Name for a transmission range.

Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD . The contents of about five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the

Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and multi-channel sound formats.

C

BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for

Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore supported by almost every popular graphics software package without any problems.

C

CA Module: The Conditional Access module contains the coding system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the

Smart Card.

If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes are decoded.

CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides universal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices

(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is referred to by Loewe as

Digital Link HD .

Channel (WLAN): Devices that want to communicate with each other have to use the same WiFi channel. In Europe the WiFi frequency band is currently divided into 13 channels.

Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting sound or pictures.

CI slot: See Common Interface .

Client: Also called network client, describes an end device such as your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a

(media) server to make it accessible to the user.

Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standardised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules ( CA modules ) and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.

Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advancement of the Common

Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended regulations apply however to CI Plus.

Component: See Component connection .

Component connection: Also referred to as Component.

Connection where the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch) connections. It comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour difference signals Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).

Conditional Access module: See CA module .

D

DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP server.

DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assignment of IP addresses to clients.

Digital Link HD: System for controlling units via the HDMI connection of the Loewe TV set when they have been set up in a covered position.

DMM: Abbreviation for Digital Movie Mode. Whether a studio recording, live broadcast, or feature film – the broadcast images are always displayed optimally. Still images are reproduced in all their sharpness and tranquillity. By creating intermediate images, DMM enables perfect studio quality, even with quick movements.

DNC: Abbreviation for “Digital Noise Control”. Weak TV signals (analogue) can generate disruptive picture noise. DNC adjusts the effect of digital noise reduction to the picture contents.

DNS: Abbreviation for Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g. www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses . DNS servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into the corresponding IP addresses.

Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel sound. The digital standard for high quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broadcast separately in this standard. The three front channels right, left and centre, the two surround channels right and left and the external subwoofer channels are called a 5.1 signal.

Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel sound. Converts a Dolby- coded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.

Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel sound. Dolby Pro Logic II is a further development of Dolby Pro Logic . This method generates a 6-channel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left, centre, front right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).

Dolby Surround: An analogue surround sound system which uses a matrix coding to fit four sound channels into two sound tracks.

Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology simulates the surround playback of a real 5.1 channel playback with only two speakers.

DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license issued by the provider (to be paid for).

DTS: Digital Theatre Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.

148

Reference 55-85

User manual

Glossary

D (continued)

DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.

Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG ,

Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology.

CST for terrestrial or antenna distribution.

DVD: Abbreviation for Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.

DVD preceiver: Combi device of DVD player and radio without integrated amplifier.

Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is adapted in case of a high black content in the picture. The so-called backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases temporarily, i.e. dynamically.

I

ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Information about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved here among other things. This data is then processed by the PC using an ID3 tag editor.

IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.

IR-Link: The IR Link function allows the operation of accessory devices with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the

Loewe TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an accessory and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.

J

JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee, which has developed a standardised method for the compression of digital images. This method JPEG ( JPG for short), named after the committee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.

E

Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG .

EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed

TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition brief descriptions of the content of the programmes are also displayed.

Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs).

Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.

Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set.

This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.

Exif: Standard format for additional data with modern digital cameras, e.g. date and time, aperture, light sensitivity, alignment of the camera

(portrait/landscape).

F

FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages is not available in FLOF.

L

LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a name for networks with cabling (Ethernet).

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location numbers.

LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low

Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to a lower intermediate frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.

G

Gateway: Transition to another network; in this case connection from the home network to the Internet.

The network device that establishes this connection is normally used as a standard gateway. As a rule, the DSL router also represents the

Internet gateway.

H

HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not dependent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online services seamlessly over broadband Internet (DSL).

HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of audio and video data.

HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface, represents a newly developed interface for the fully digital transfer of audio and video data.

HD Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable of displaying high-definition television ( HDTV ).

HDTV (HD): High Definition Television is a collective term, designating a series of high-resolution television standards.

High and low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.

Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that makes data available. Refer also to media server.

M

MAC address: Hardware address of a network adaptor, e.g., he network card in the PC. It is issued permanently by the manufacturer and is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.

Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in megabits, i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum speed is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g) or 300 (IEEE 802.11n) Mbit/ sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec or 100 Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet).

Media Server: Stands for the device on which multimedia content is stored, but is also the name for the service provided by the device that makes this data available to the network.

Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.

Mono: Single channel sound.

MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.

MPEG: Digital compression method for video.

Multimedia content: Videos, music files and photos are grouped together under this term.

N

NAS: The term describes a hard disk which is independently linked to the network (i.e. without a PC).

Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specification is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.

NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Sweden, and Spain.

NTSC: American colour standard, stands for National Television

Standards Committee.

149

Reference 55-85

User manual

Glossary

P

Page Catching: For teletext, refers to marking and calling a page number.

PAL: European colour standard, stands for phase alternation line.

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.

Picture in Picture: See PIP .

PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the screen.

Pixel: Also called picture element or pel. Denotes both the smallest unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.

Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.

PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available grid graphics format for loss-free compression.

Port: It allows assignment of data packages to various services which are running on one device under the same network address.

Powerline : Powerline designates a type of wired network connection in which data is transferred via the domestic electricity network using optionally available adaptors.

Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEG s are built up gradually. The quality of the picture increases progressively during the loading process.

ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique

– but real full pictures.

PSK: Clients that wish to connect to a wireless network secured with

PSK must know this key.

R

RGB: Colour signals Red, Green and Blue.

Router: Device for connecting several networks, e.g., home network and Internet.

T

Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.

TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix, however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.

Tuner: Another term for receiver.

U

Ultra HD: Ultra HD (abbr. for Ultra High Definition) is a digital highdefinition video format, which is about four times the resolution of

HDTV.

USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external devices (USB card reader, USB stick).

UPnP AV Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers.

Has become a widespread standard for home networking.

V

VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.

W

WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard process in the WiFi encryption, now outdated.

Wired network: see LAN.

Wireless network: see WLAN.

WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also abbreviated as wireless network.

WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft own audio data format. As with MP3 files, the content is compressed here as well.

WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, proprietary Microsoft video data format.

WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as standard encryption for wireless networks.

S

Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.

SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.

SECAM: French colour standard, stands for Séquentiel à mémoire.

Set-top box: Set-top box (STB for short) refers to a device in entertainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a

TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.

Signal input group: Depending on the applied signal, the signal sources are divided into different groups.

Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.

Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.

Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the respective programme provider or by the certification free Pay TV operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module .

Static contrast ratio: Describes the difference between the brightest and darkest picture display.

Stereo : Dual channel sound.

Switch : Device for connecting several computers to a network.

Switching voltage: Video devices supply this voltage to switch the

TV set to playback.

Symbol rate: Specifies the transmission speed for data transmission.

Y

Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-top boxes.

.

YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation for signals in standard resolution ( SDTV ). The YCbCr colour model, in which, e.g., DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV colour model used in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the data is transferred via digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without being converted.

YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection .

The analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a converter in the source player and then output at the 3 component outputs of the source player.

YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accordance with the standards PAL and NTSC . YUV is often informally referred to when YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in digital applications) is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature modulation during PAL or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.

150

Reference 55-85

User manual

EC Declaration of Conformity

Ɍɨɡɢɭɪɟɞɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹɧɚɨɫɧɨɜɧɢɬɟɢɡɢɫɤɜɚɧɢɹɢɪɚɡɲɢɪɟɧɢɬɟɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɧɢɩɪɟɞɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢ Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚȿɋ Ɋɚɡɪɟɲɟ

ɧɨɟɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɜɴɜɜɫɢɱɤɢɞɴɪɠɚɜɢɨɬ ȿɋ ɢɨɫɜɟɧɬɨɜɚɜ ɂɫɥɚɧɞɢɹ ɇɨɪɜɟɝɢɹ ɢ ɒɜɟɣɰɚɪɢɹ ȼɴɜ Ɏɪɚɧɰɢɹ ɢ ɂɬɚɥɢɹ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɟɪɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨ ɫɚɦɨɜɡɚɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ

.

7RWR]DĜt]HQtMHYVRXODGXVH]iNODGQtPLSRåDGDYN\DRVWDWQtPLRGSRYtGDMtFtPLXVWDQRYHQtPL 6PČUQLFH(* .

0ĤåHEêW

SRXåtYDQYHYãHFK]HPtFK (8 GRGDWHþQČWDNpQD ,VODQGX Y 1RUVNX DYH âYêFDUVNX 9H )UDQFLL DY ,WDOLL MHSRXåLWtSĜtVWUR -

MHGRYROHQp MHQRPYLQWHULpUX .

Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/

EG . Es darf in allen Ländern der EU sowie zusätzlich in Island , Norwegen und der Schweiz betrieben werden. In Frankreich und Italien ist die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.

Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF . Det må kun anvendes i EU-landene samt i Island , Norge og Schweiz . I Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det indendørs .

Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/CE . Puede operar en todos los países de la UE y adicionalmente en Islandia , Noruega y Suiza . En Francia e Italia , su uso está permitido

únicamente en espacios interiores .

Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräysten mukainen. Laitetta saa käyttää kaikissa EU-maissa sekä Islannissa , Norjassa ja Sveitsissä . Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta saa käyttää vain sisätiloissa .

Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC .

L‘utilisation est possible dans tous les pays de l‘ UE , en Islande , en Norvège et en Suisse . En France et en Italie l‘utilisation est autorisée uniquement dans des espaces fermés .

This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC . It may be operated in all countries in the EU and also in Iceland , Norway and Switzerland . In France and Italy it may only be used indoors .

ǹȣĲȩȢȠİȟȠʌȜȚıȩȢİȓȞĮȚıİıȣȩȡĳȦıȘİĲȚȢȠȣıȚȫįİȚȢĮʌĮȚĲȒıİȚȢțĮȚȐȜȜİȢıȤİĲȚțȑȢįȚĮĲȐȟİȚȢĲȘȢ ȅįȘȖȓĮȢ(&

ǼʌȚĲȡȑʌİĲĮȚȘȜİȚĲȠȣȡȖȓĮĲȘȢıİȩȜİȢĲȚȢȤȫȡİȢĲȘȢ ǼǼ țĮșȫȢțĮȚıĲȘȞ ǿıȜĮȞįȓĮ ıĲȘȞ ȃȠȡȕȘȖȓĮ țĮȚıĲȘȞ ǼȜȕİĲȓĮ ȈĲȘȞ īĮȜȜȓĮ țĮȚıĲȘȞ ǿĲĮȜȓĮ İʌȚĲȡȑʌİĲĮȚȘȤȡȒıȘ ȝȩȞȠıİİıȦĲİȡȚțȠȪȢȤȫȡȠȣȢ .

Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE . Può essere messo in funzione in tutti i paesi dell‘ UE e inoltre in Islanda , Norvegia e in Svizzera . In Francia e in Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in ambienti chiusi .

Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF . Det kan brukes i alle EU-land og dessuten i Island , Norge og Sveits . I Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.

Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1999/5/EG . Het gebruik is toegestaan in alle landen van de EU en ook in IJsland , Noorwegen en Zweden . In Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik slechts binnenshuis toegestaan.

Este aparelho está em conformidade com os requisitos fundamentais e todas as restantes disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/

CE . Pode ser utilizado em todos os países da UE assim como na Islândia , Noruega e Suíça . Em França e Itália a sua utilização apenas é permitida em espaços interiores.

Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC .

Apparaten får användas i alla länder inom EU liksom på Island , i Norge och i Schweiz . I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten användas endast inomhus .

151

Reference 55-85

User manual

Index

0-9

3D ......................................................................................................75

3D function .......................................................................................76

A

Access code .................................................................................... 89

Adding stations to personal list ...................................................... 85

Additional functions for DR+ archive playback .............................. 61

Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier ..................................................... 116

Adjusting the sound .........................................................................78

Adjust size of the PIP image ............................................................97

Allow switching voltage ...................................................................117

Antenna DVB ......................................................................74

, 111 , 117

Antenna DVB-S ...............................................................................117

Antenna DVB-T ................................................................................117

ARC .................................................................................................128

Archive recording ............................................................................ 45

Artist Search ................................................................................... 68

Audio commentary ..........................................................................97

AUDIO key ......................................................................................130

Audio playback

Playback ....................................................................................... 65

Audio playback from external devices ..........................................129

Audio/Radio .............................................................................. 32 , 64

Audio return channel .....................................................................128

Auto dimming ...................................................................................74

Auto dimming - Room .............................................................. 75 , 76

Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) ........................................................76

Auto format (AMD) ..........................................................................75

Automatic menu info ....................................................................... 19

Automatic rotate ............................................................................. 69

Automatic scan TV+Radio ....................................................... 74 , 80

Automatic shutdown .........................................................................7

Automatic time control ................................................................... 56

Auto volume .....................................................................................74

AV connecting settings ......................................................74

, 111 , 117

AV list ............................................................................................... 36

AV output signal ...............................................................................74

C

Cable fixing ....................................................................................... 12

Camcorder .....................................................................................123

CA modul ........................................................................................ 121

Change title of an archive recording .............................................. 48

Changing the station list ................................................................. 33

Character table ................................................................................ 18

Cinema Surround ............................................................................79

CI slot .............................................................................................. 121

Cleaning and care ..............................................................................7

Clear data base ............................................................................... 88

Clock display .................................................................................... 19

Code number .................................................................................. 89

Color intensity ..................................................................................74

Coloured keys .................................................................................. 40

Colour intensity ................................................................................75

Colour temperature ...................................................................74

, 75

Common Interface Plus ................................................................. 121

Component connection ................................................................126

Compose / edit Personal list .......................................................... 85

Connecting active loudspeakers ..................................................128

Connecting antennas ...................................................................... 13

Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................128

Connecting home network .............................................................. 14

Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ........................... 127

Connecting the speaker system (DAL) ........................................ 127

Connecting the TV set ..................................................................... 13

Connections ..........................................................................10

, 11 , 74

Contrast ......................................................................................74

, 75

Control ..............................................................................................74

Create new personal list ................................................................. 85

Crossover ........................................................................................ 69

B

Balance .......................................................................................74

, 79

Batteries ........................................................................................... 14

Bluetooth ..................................................................................74

, 109

Blu-ray player .................................................................................123

Bookmarks

Delete ........................................................................................... 62

Delete individual ones ................................................................. 62

Jump ............................................................................................. 61

Set ...........................................................................................45

, 61

Brightness ..................................................................................74

, 75

Browser .............................................................................................73

D

Data capture .................................................................................... 88

Deblocking filter .........................................................................74

, 75

Delete

Bookmarks .................................................................................. 62 individual bookmarks .................................................................. 62

Recording ..................................................................................... 48

Delete manager ............................................................................... 50

Set delete protection for timer recording .................................. 56

Setting/cancelling delete protection .......................................... 50

Delete personal list ......................................................................... 85

Deleting blocks ................................................................................ 84

Deleting stations from the personal list ........................................ 85

Devices on AV .................................................................................125

Digital Link ......................................................................... 74 , 111 , 118

Digital Link HD ................................................................................124

Digital Link HD functionality .......................................................... 118

Digital Noise Control (DNC) ......................................................74

, 75

Direct recording .............................................................................. 45

Display .............................................................................................. 15

Dolby PLII mode ...............................................................................78

DR+ ...................................................................................................74

152

Reference 55-85

User manual

Index

DR+ archive ......................................................................................47

DR+ Streaming ....................................................................51

, 74 , 119

Notify started „Follow me“ recording ........................................ 99

DR+ Streaming settings ................................................................. 98

Also use other archives ............................................................... 99

DR+ device group name ............................................................. 99

DR+ device name ........................................................................ 99

DR+ standby ................................................................................ 99

IP port number ............................................................................ 99

Share DR+ archive with other devices ....................................... 99

DVB character set ............................................................................97

DVB settings ...............................................................................74

, 97

DVD player ......................................................................................123

I

Image+ Active ............................................................................74

, 75

Initial installation wizard ................................................................. 20

Installing the TV set ......................................................................... 12

Instant Channel Zapping ................................................................ 33

Instant recording ............................................................................. 45

Integrated features ........................................................... 74 , 119 , 120

Interval functions ............................................................................ 62

Deleting part of the recording .................................................... 63

Hide .............................................................................................. 62

J

Jump ................................................................................................ 59

Jump distance ................................................................................. 98

Jumping to Bookmarks ................................................................... 61

E

Edit new personal list ...................................................................... 85

Edit personal list .............................................................................. 85

Energy efficiency ................................................................ 20 , 74 , 90

Environment ...................................................................................142

EPG .............................................................................................37

, 74

Explanation of keys .......................................................................... 19

Explanation of symbols ................................................................... 19

Export archive entries ..................................................................... 49

Export log file ............................................................................74

, 103

Extras ........................................................................................ 74 , 119

L

Language .....................................................................20

, 74 , 88 , 135

Licence agreement ......................................................................... 20

LNC/LNB .............................................................................25

, 27 , 28

Loudness ....................................................................................74

, 78

F

Favourites ........................................................................................ 32

Film quality improvement (DMM) ............................................74

, 75

FLOF ................................................................................................. 40

Follow-Me function ....................................................................51

, 58

Function list ..................................................................................... 36

Function of the TEXT key .............................................................. 100

G

Game console ........................................................................ 118 , 123

Gaming mode .................................................................... 74 , 111 , 118

Gamma brightness correction ........................................................75

General information on menu operation ........................................ 16

H

Hard disks .................................................................................74

, 102

Checking .....................................................................................102

Formatting ..................................................................................102

HbbTV ................................................................................42

, 74 , 100

HbbTV-Modus ............................................................................... 100

HbbTV text ...................................................................................... 42

HDMI ...............................................................................................123

HDMI CEC .......................................................................................124

Headphone volume ........................................................................ 36

History ............................................................................................. 34

Home ............................................................................................... 32

Home networking systems ...........................................................129

Home view ....................................................................................... 32

M

Mains switch .................................................................................9

, 15

Manual scan TV ............................................................................... 80

Manuell scan (incl. antenna status) ................................................74

Maximum switch on volume ...........................................................74

Maximum volume ......................................................................74

, 79

MediaNet .......................................................................................... 71

Browse ..........................................................................................72

Exit ................................................................................................. 71

Settings .........................................................................................72

Mobile phone keyboard ................................................................... 18

Mobile Recording .....................................................................74

, 108

Move block ...................................................................................... 84

Move picture up/down ...............................................................74

, 75

Move stations in the personal list .................................................. 85

Moving of archive entries ............................................................... 49

Multimedia / Network .....................................................................74

Multimedia settings .................................................................74

, 107

Multi recording ................................................................................ 46

Multiroom ........................................................................................ 52

Multi select ...................................................................................... 48

Music playback

Repeat .......................................................................................... 66

Shuffle playback .......................................................................... 66

Winding ........................................................................................ 65

N

Networking .....................................................................................104

Network selection ..................................................................... 22 , 23

Network settings ......................................................................74

, 104

Notify hidden sections .................................................................... 98

Numerical keys ...........................................................................16

, 33

153

Reference 55-85

User manual

Index

O

One touch recording ....................................................................... 45

On/Off button ...............................................................................9

, 15

On-screen displays ................................................................... 74 , 96

OPC ...................................................................................................75

Renderer ...................................................................................74

, 107

Repeat initial installation ....................................................20

, 74 , 119

Reset to factory settings ................................................. 74 , 119 , 120

Restore stations .............................................................................. 84

Rotate TV ........................................................................................ 101

Rotating the TV set .......................................................................... 41

P

Page selection ................................................................................. 40

Parental lock ........................................................................50

, 74 , 89

PC ....................................................................................................125

PC IN - Display ..................................................................................75

Permanent clock display ................................................................. 19

Personal list ..................................................................................... 34

Add station .................................................................................. 85

Create new list ............................................................................. 85

Delete list ..................................................................................... 85

Delete station .............................................................................. 85

Move station ................................................................................ 85

Rename list .................................................................................. 85

P

Photo ..........................................................................................32

, 69

Exit ................................................................................................ 70

Full-screen mode ......................................................................... 70

Rotate photo ................................................................................ 70

Slide show .................................................................................... 70

Picture ...............................................................................................74

Picture adjustment ............................................................. 74 , 75 , 77

Picture format ..................................................................... 74 , 75 , 77

4:3 .................................................................................................77

16:9 ................................................................................................77

PALplus .........................................................................................77

Panorama .....................................................................................77

Zoom .............................................................................................77

Picture settings ................................................................................75

PIP .............................................................................................. 43 , 74

PIP Settings ......................................................................................97

Positioning/aligning the DVB-T antenna .......................................117

Post-record time ............................................................................. 98

Pre-record time ............................................................................... 98

Proxy server ........................................................................... 104 , 106

Q

Quick start mode ...................................................................... 74

R

, 90

Radio mode ............................................................................... 67 , 68

Record conflict ................................................................................ 54

Recording ........................................................................................ 98

Remote control ................................................................... 8 , 14 , 130

Remote TV switch on of the TV set .............................................. 118

Renaming the HDMI port designation ..........................................123

Renaming the personal list ............................................................. 85

S

Safety ............................................................................................. 6 , 7

Satellite selection ......................................................... 25 , 26 , 27 , 28

Satellite system ................................................................................24

Scope of delivery ................................................................................5

Scrambled stations ...............................................22

, 23 , 29 , 81 , 122

Screen cleaning ..............................................................................143

Search for artists ............................................................................ 68

Selecting a station out of the station list ....................................... 33

Select station .................................................................................. 33 using the numerical keys ............................................................ 33 via personal lists .......................................................................... 34 with P+/P- ................................................................................... 33

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ...................................................129

Serial recording tolerance .............................................................. 98

Service ............................................................................................156

Set covers ......................................................................................... 12

Setting the volume .......................................................................... 33

Set-top box .....................................................................................123

Sharpness ..................................................................................74

, 75

Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button ................................... 118

Side by side ......................................................................................76

Signal type .......................................................................................117

Skin tone .....................................................................................74

, 75

Slide show speed ............................................................................ 69

Smart Assist App ...........................................................................134

Smart Card ..................................................................................... 121

Smart jump ...............................................................................59

, 98

Smart tv2move App ......................................................................133

Software ............................................................................................74

Software download .......................................................................... 91

Software update

Automatic update via the internet ............................................. 95

Manually via Antenna .................................................................. 93

Via Antenna ................................................................................. 94

Via USB memory medium ......................................................... 92

Sound ..........................................................................................74

, 78

Sound adjustment .....................................................................74

, 78

Sound components ...................................................74

, 111 , 112 , 127

Sound mode ...............................................................................74

, 78

Sound picture synchronisation .................................................74

, 78

Sources ............................................................................................ 32

Standard Teletext .............................................................................74

Standby mode .................................................................................. 15

Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations ............................................. 100

Station lists Radio ...............................................................74

, 80 , 84

Station lists TV ....................................................................74

, 80 , 84

Stations ...................................................................................... 74 , 80

154

Reference 55-85

User manual

Index

Station search ................................................................................. 68

Status display .................................................................................. 35

STB key ...........................................................................................130

Stop recording early ....................................................................... 46

Subtitle ......................................................................... 46 , 63 , 97 , 98

Supply voltage 5V ...........................................................................117

Surround Mode ................................................................................74

Surround modus ..............................................................................78

Switching off the TV set during recording ..................................... 46

Switch off .......................................................................................... 15

Switch on .......................................................................................... 15

Switch-on volume ............................................................................79

Switch to live picture ....................................................................... 44

System settings ........................................................................ 32 , 74

T

Teletext ............................................................................................ 40

Time and date ........................................................................... 74 , 96

Time display ..................................................................................... 19

Timer ................................................................................................ 53

Timer list ...................................................................................... 53

Timer Services ............................................................................ 56

Timer data ....................................................................................... 55

Automatic time control ............................................................... 56

Beginning ..................................................................................... 55

Date .............................................................................................. 55

Delete protection ......................................................................... 56

End ............................................................................................... 55

Favourite ...................................................................................... 56

Folder ........................................................................................... 55

Lock recording ............................................................................. 56

Recording subtitles ..................................................................... 56

Recording type ............................................................................ 55

Station .......................................................................................... 55

Timer Services ................................................................................ 53

Time shift ......................................................................................... 44

TOP .................................................................................................. 40

Top/bottom ......................................................................................76

Transfer all station lists ................................................................... 80

TV ............................................................................................... 32 , 33

TV key .......................................................................................14

, 130

TV on when memorised ................................................................. 88

TV viewing with time shift ........................................................ 44 , 45

U

Update station list automatically ............................................. 74 , 80

UPnP ................................................................................................. 14

USB stick .......................................................................................... 91

V

Value-added service ................................................................... 8 , 42

VBD+ .................................................................................................75

VESA standard ............................................................................... 141

Video .......................................................................................... 32 , 57

VIDEO key .......................................................................................130

Video playback

Change picture format ................................................................. 61

Jump by entering a time ............................................................. 59

Playback ....................................................................................... 58

Repeat .......................................................................................... 60

Selecting language/sound ........................................................... 61

Winding ........................................................................................ 60

Viewing a locked movie .................................................................. 50

Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording ........................................................................................ 45

Volume adjustment ...................................................................74

, 78

W

Wake on LAN/WiFi .........................................................................104

Watching other stations during archive recording ....................... 45

Web .............................................................................................32

, 71

WEB key function .................................................................... 74 , 100

Y

YPbPr ..............................................................................................126

YUV .................................................................................................126

155

Reference 55-85

User manual

Service

Qualifi Pty Ltd

24 Lionel Road

Mt.Waverley VIC 3149 Australia

Tel +61-03-8542 1111

Fax +61-03-9543 3677

E-mail: [email protected]

Gaplasa S.A.

Conde de Torroja, 25

28022 Madrid, España

Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60

Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75


Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA

Uilenbaan 84

2160 Wommelgem, België

Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30

Fax +32 - 3 - 2 71 01 08


Loewe France SAS

Rue du Dépôt,

13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010

67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France

Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50

Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59


Telion AG

Rütistrasse 26

8952 Schlieren, Schweiz

Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11

Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02


EET Europarts

Loewe Finland

Metsänneidonkuja 12

02130 Espoo, Finland

Tel +358 9 47 850 900 www.eeteuroparts.fi

Guangdong MG Audio Development Co.Ltd

No.8 Jinghu Rd. Xinhua St. Huadu Reg.

GZ, PRC

Tel +86-(0)20-22675666

Fax +86-(0)20-22675777


Xiamen Tenote Investment Co. Ltd

26F 3# Xinglin Bay Operation Center,

No.478 xinglinwan Avenue,

Jimei District, Xiamen, Fujian, PRC

Tel +86-400 088 1566


Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.

121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587

1511 Nicosia, Cyprus

Tel +357 - 22 87 21 11

Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91


Loewe UK Limited

1st Floor, 237A Kensington High St

London

W8 6SA, UK

Tel +44 - (0) 207 368 1100

Fax +44 - (0) 207 368 1101


Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.

321 Mesogion Av.

152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas

Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00

Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04

E-mail: christina_argyropoulou@ isembel.gr

BaSys CS s.r.o.

Sodomkova 1478/8

10200 Praha 10 - Hostivar,

Česká republika

Tel +420 234 706 700

Fax +420 234 706 701


Plug&Play Ltd.

Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb

Hrvatska (Kroatia)

Tel +385 1 4929 683

Fax +385 1 4929 682


Loewe Technologies GmbH,

Customer Care Center

Industriestraße 11

96317 Kronach, Deutschland

Tel +49 9261 99-500

Fax +49 9261 99-515


Loewe Italiana S.r.L.

Via Monte Baldo, 14/P – 14/N

37069 Dossobuono di Villafranca di

Verona

Tel +39 - 045 82 51 690

Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622


EET Europarts

Loewe Denmark

Bregnerødvej 133 D

3460 Birkerød, Denmark

Tel +45 - 82 19 19


Clear electronic entertainment Ltd

13 Noah Mozes St.

Agish Ravad Building

Tel Aviv 67442, Israel

Tel +972 - 3 - 6091100

Fax +972 - 3 - 6092200


Nonplus Ultra Home Automation Pvt Ltd

First Floor, No. 615, Second Main Road

Indiranagar Stage I, Indiranagar

Bangalore 560038

India

Tel +91 80 41114599


3LOGIC Sp.z o.o. ul. Zakopiańska 153

30-435 Kraków

Tel +48 - 12 640 20 00

Fax +48 - 12 640 20 01 www.3logic.pl

Pars Royal Taramesh

LOEWE Gallery

#3 Shariati St. Opp. Soheil St.

P.O Box 1914965537

Tehran, Iran

Tel + 98 21-22391661

E-Mail: [email protected]

JOR

ACCU-TECH Solutions Co.

1-Kharija Al-Ashja‘i Street

Jabal Al-Weibdeh

P.O.Box 9668 Amman 11191, Jordan

Tel: +962-6-465-9985

Fax: +962-6-465-0119

E-Mail: [email protected]

V2 Indonesia

5th Intiland tower

Jl. Jenderal Sudirman 32

Jakarta 10220, INDONESIA

Tel +62-21 57853547


I Control SAL

Gemmaizeh, Rmeil.

Building 328 1st Floor Beirut, Lebanon

Tel +961 1 446777 / 1 587446

Fax +961 1 582446


LOEWE Show Room

Olaya Street, Near Kingdom Center

RIYADH, SAUDI ARABIA

P.O Box 92831 Riyadh 11663

Tel +966-11-4640927

Fax +966-11-4640759


Service Center Loewe

Aptekarsky per.4 podjezd 5A

105005 Moscow, Russia

Tel +7 - 499 940 42 32 ( ext. 454 )

Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01


Kpartners, SIA

A.Čaka iela 80

Rīga, LV-1011, Latvia

Tel +3 71 - 67 29 29 59

Fax +3 71 - 67 31 05 68


EET Europarts AB

Loewe Sweden

Box 4124

SE-131 04, Nacka, Sverige

Tel +46 - 8 507 510 00


A Cappella Ltd.

Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.

01129 Vilnius, Lithuania

Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96

Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81


Atlas Care Centre

11 changi south street 3

#03-01 builders centre

Singapore 486122

Tel +65 - 6745 2028

Fax +65 - 6546 7861


EET Europarts AS

Olaf Helsetsvei 6 (Vekstsenteret)

0694 Oslo, Norge

Tel +47 - 22919500


ENKAY GROUP

SERVISPLUS MUSTERI HIZMETLERI

Alemdag Cad. Site Yolu No:18

Umraniye, Istanbul, TÜRKIYE

Tel 444 4 784


Gaplasa S.A.

Rua Professor Henrique de Barros

Edifício Sagres, 2º. C

2685-338 Prior Velho, Portugal

Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30

Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78


Volco Enterprise Close Corporation

Unit 8

7 on Mastiff (Road)

Longlake Ext 1, Lingbro Business Park

2165 Johannesburg

Tel +27 11 608 1228

Fax +27 11 608 1740


© by Loewe Technologies 01.09.15

156

Reference 55-85

User manual

Code page

STB

A

AKAI 033,

AUDIOTON 059,

AUSTAR 212,

B

054, 210, 223, 226

051

BLAUPUNKT 090,

C

BSAT 166,

AEGIR 179

AIWA 141

ALBA

ARCON

AXIS

BLUE SKY

BOCA

BRAIN WAVE

CAMBRIDGE

111, 126, 180, 201

025, 051, 079, 132, 136, 161

ARTHUR MARTIN

ASTRA

ASTRO

AVALON 047

BEKO 067

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

BRANDT 069

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 050,

BRITISH TELECOM

BSKYB 227

BT

BT SATELLITE

BUBU SAT

BUSH

BVV 161

ABLETIME

CANAL 019

CITYCOM

CLEMENS KAMPHUS

CLYDE CABLE VISION

104

060, 017, 067, 104,

ALCATEL 336

ALDES

ALLSAT

ALLSONIC

ALLTECH

133, 168, 179, 201

033, 048, 059, 077, 201

133, 168, 226

060, 137, 225

ALPHA 033

ALTAI 047

AMITRONICA 060

AMPERE

AMSTRAD

047, 186, 207

060, 006, 047, 071, 097,

132, 165, 174, 175, 186,

212, 216, 217, 227, 228

ANGLO 060

ANKARO 060, 051, 133,

161, 162, 168, 226

ANTTRON 017, 077, 180

APOLLO 017

CONTEC

COSAT 059

EUROPA 006, 033, 161,

162, 164, 169, 212

EUROPEAN 163

EUROSKY

EUROSTAR

F AGOR 059

FERGUSON

FIDELITY 006, 071, 097

FILMNET 318

FINLUX

G SAT

COMCRYPT 320,

009, 010, 021, 067, 220

FINNSAT 110

FRANCE TELECOM

FREECOM

FREESAT 137

FTE

GMI 175

GOLDBOX

CRYPTOVISION 067,

D AERYUNG 047

DAEWOO

CHOSTAR

EMME ESSE

EP SAT

060, 017, 025

DAUMLING 163

DECCA 038

DECSAT

DECSAT CANAL

HARTING UND HELLING

HASE & IGEL

DEW 025,

DIAMOND 225

DIRECTV 144

DISCOVERER 197

DISK EXPRESS

ARMSTRONG 033,

130

ASA 009

033

ASLF 060

194

ASTACOM 171,

095

013, 021, 025, 098, 099

164, 175, 178, 190, 222, 223

006, 091, 094, 176,

177, 179, 180, 181

E

ELEKTA 179

ELSAT 071

ARCOM 021,

226

343

060, 217

163, 169, 175, 186,

199, 207, 222

094, 161

341

BROADCAST 013

104, 171, 172, 229, 335

171

060

048, 077, 106, 126

308, 311, 312, 333, 334

006, 104, 199

135, 164, 203, 204, 230

CLARK 180

CLATRONIC 094

133, 210

317

CNT 179

COMCAST 004

162

COMMLINK 168

COMMUNICADO 054

168

CONDOR 164,

CONNEXIONS

DEUTSCHE TELEKOM

ELTASAT 059

EMANON 017

INGELEN 088,

EURIEULT 185,

EUROCRYPT 021,

EURODEC 110,

223

BRUNS 133

JOK

JSR 059

K ABELVISION 330

EUTRA 137,

EXATOR

CANAL DIGITAL

CANAL PLUS

128

128, 019, 320, 321

CANAL SATELLITE 128, 191, 211

CANARY 137

CARAT.SOM 054

CHAPARRAL 012,

CHESS 197

FUBA

047, 096, 226, 231

054, 135, 169

315

CYBERMAXX 116

CYRUS 037

214

310

310

DELFA 212

056

051

DISMOND 225

059

DNR 161

DNT 033, 037, 047, 231

DRAKE 029

DST 017

DUNE 226

DYNASAT 196

198

060, 006, 017, 097, 163,

168, 169, 175, 186, 222

017, 033, 059, 226

133, 213, 226

067

164, 175, 186, 226

164, 215, 233, 234

017, 104, 180

023, 048, 067, 077,

106, 108, 111, 124, 206

060, 080, 136, 137, 169,

196, 199, 212, 226

010, 014, 017, 021, 047,

051, 088, 135, 176, 220, 226

077, 130

GALAXI 051

054, 059, 133, 161, 168,

209, 210, 211, 212, 223,

226, 236, 237, 238

GALAXISAT 127

GARDINER 204

GENIX 024

GENERAL-INSTRUMENTS 332

GIUCAR RECORD

I

ITT

ITT NOKIA

163

080, 081, 133, 193

059, 137, 180, 203

KREISELMEYER 176

K-SAT 060

MICRO STAR

NORDMENDE

NTL CABLETELL

180

060

116

116

073

NEIRU 079

NETA P

NETWORK 077

NEUHAUS

NEUSAT

NEXTWAVE 138

NIKKO

NOKIA

KYOSTAR 017,

KYOTO GMI ATLAN

L &S ELECTRONIC

089

128, 191, 211

111

143

226

054, 164, 175, 179,

186, 199, 222, 226

161, 162, 247

060, 017, 025, 079, 161,

162, 164, 193, 221, 223, 226

059

LENSON 006

LEXUS 033

LEYCO 104

M &B1 197

GRAETZ 088,

GRANADA 021,

GRANDIN 185,

GROTHUSEN 017,

GRUNDIG

H ANSEATIC 197

094

HANURI 179

085, 122

037

MASCOM 081

MASPRO

242

MASTER_S 135

MATSUI

HINARI 017,

HIRSCHMANCE 090

HITACHI

HOUSTON

HUMAX

HUTH

CX 138

IKUSI ALLSAT 136

IMEX 185

099

INNOVATION 116

INTERNATIONAL 186

INTERTRONIC 175

INTERVISION 042, 059, 164, 170

INVIDEO 213

ITALTEL 213

021, 067, 088, 099, 120, 123

EUROSAT 175,

193

026, 003, 067, 090, 097,

171, 172, 176, 217, 227,

240, 241, 242, 020, 307, 316

HIGH PERFORMANCE

DISEQC 171,

133

161

113, 133, 171, 172, 176,

196, 203, 216, 219, 243

HISAWA 094

067, 106, 111, 120

HNE 165

059, 071, 161, 162, 171

212, 236, 244, 005

013, 054, 059, 094, 133,

136, 161, 162, 163, 164,

168, 169, 175, 186

HYPERVISION 345

060, 021, 047, 086,

088, 128, 211, 213

EIF 014,

IMPERIAL 126

099, 120, 123, 214

LORENZEN 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 186

LORRAINE 193

LUPUS 226

LUXOR 006, 010, 021, 088, 097,

099, 120, 123, 130, 214

LYONNAISE 110

MEDIABOX 191,

MEDIASAT

METRONIC

KAMM 060,

N

060, 026, 003, 093, 096,

106, 108, 113, 137, 161,

003, 109, 171, 172, 176

MAX 164

MEDIAMARKT 175

006, 128, 191, 211, 223

MEDION 060,

MEDISON 060

MEGA 033

MELECTRONIC 204

MEMPHIS 054,

060, 017, 117, 119, 121,

MICRO ELECTRONIC

MICRO MAXX

249

090

MITSUBISHI 067,

MITSUMI 222

222,

JOHANSSON 059,

KEY WEST

KOLON 017

KONIG 164

FINLANDIA 021,

FLAIR MATE 060

FORCE 068

FOXTEL

FRACARRO

235, 022, 319

017, 087, 196, 213

344

017, 193, 201

KOSMOS

KR

LASAT

LEMON

LENCO

009, 010, 021, 067, 088,

138, 330, 332, 341, 343

171, 172, 200, 229

060, 033, 037, 080, 081,

090, 091, 094, 096, 112,

114, 135, 166, 176, 180,

196, 204, 218, 245, 246

MICRO TEC

MNET

MORGAN

MOVIE TIME

225, 232, 248, 329

060, 171, 172

042, 059, 067, 106,

111, 151, 171, 172,

179, 210, 221

211

131, 146, 147, 149, 151,

152, 153, 154, 156, 157,

168, 175, 179, 180, 185,

204,

METZ 090,

MICRO 164,

MICRO TECHNOLOGY

MICRONIK

060

060, 190, 223

MINERVA 003,

328

329

MULTICHOICE 100,

MULTISTAR 080

193

MYRYAD 037

NOMEX 221

NOOS 329

NORCO 221

017, 067, 179, 206

NOVIS 094

NSC 328

O

320, 321, 342

060, 033, 059, 132, 163,

169, 175, 186, 199, 207,

AVEX 094

140

060, 006, 059, 161,

162, 164, 169, 210, 223,

060, 161, 210

060, 175, 201

009, 010, 021, 045, 067,

088, 099, 105, 120, 123,

211, 214, 242, 251, 346

203

332

CEANIC 225

OCTAGON 017, 025, 054, 161, 162, 180

OKANO

LG (GOLDSTAR) 079, 107, 193

LIFESAT 197,

LIFETEX 116

LOKIA 088

080, 133, 175

OLYMPIC 133

ONDIGITAL 187, 188, 189

ONO 301

OPTEX 059, 135, 196, 208

157

Reference 55-85

User manual

Code page

OPTIMA 133

OPTUS 332

ORBITECH 006, 017, 103, 169, 181, 224

P ACE

194

221

OSAT 097

253, 319, 347

191, 211, 214, 007

PROMAX 067

170

PROSONIC 165

PROTEK 225

PROVISAT 201

PROVISION 179

PVP STEREO VISUAL

Q UADRAL

QUELLE

171, 172, 173, 226

090, 097, 164, 165

QUIERO 110

037

RADIX 047, 137, 216

RC 138

RC-1000 104

RED STAR 226

REDPOINT 223

REDSTAR 226

RFT 033, 037, 161, 162, 168, 224

ROADSTAR 060

S ABA

SATMASTER 013

SATPARTNER

SATSTATION 151

SCHACKE 180

SCHAUB LORENZ

SEDEA-ELECTRONIQUE 017

SKY MASTER

SKY PLUS

TCM 116

TECHNILAND 013,

TELECOM 060

TELEKA

180, 161, 164, 175, 203, 210

TELEMASTER 179

TELEMAX 018

TELE PLUS ONE

017, 079, 094, 133, 179,

OTTO VERSAND 090

OXFORD 104

172, 179, 200, 201, 206, 217

213

POLSAT 110

PREISNER

PREMIER 059,

PREMIERE

R

001, 022, 044, 048, 050,

067, 077, 098, 108, 124,

189, 202, 227, 242, 252,

PACIFIC 225

172

PALCOM 092

PALLADIUM 003, 006, 017, 175

PALSAT 006

PANDA

PATRIOT 104

PHILIPS 026, 003, 033, 037, 051,

067, 077, 124, 128, 144,

156, 161, 162, 169, 171,

172, 176, 180, 187, 188,

191, 204, 211, 218, 229,

242, 313, 323, 329, 345

PIONEER

042, 059, 133,

142, 168, 212

128, 191, 211, 302

PIXX 255

135

094

047, 103, 163, 169,

175, 186, 199, 222

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

PYE 003

180, 193, 201

077, 108, 161, 164, 171,

088, 099

171, 172, 218

077, 114, 135, 161, 164,

169, 197, 217, 255

STS 328

STV 014

SUMIDA 175

SUNNY SOUND

197

320, 321

U

W

NIDEN

ELA

WESTMINSTER 335

SUNSAT 060,

SUNSTAR 163, 175, 186, 222, 226

SUPERCABLE 343

SUPERNOVA 189

WITTENBERG 071

WORLD 094

TECO 025, 175, 222

TELASAT 164,

XSAT

006, 197, 207

WEWA 067

TANDY 085,

RAINBOW 137,

170

077, 108, 161, 164,

SAMSUNG

SAT

SAT PARTNER

017, 080, 127, 132,

211, 243, 302, 324

006, 071, 127, 194

017, 094, 133,

SAT TEAM

179, 180, 193, 201

060

SATBOX 304

SATCOM

SATEC

013, 164, 197

060, 077, 242

SATECO 017

SATELCO 226

SATFORD 013

SATLINE 170

SCHNEIDER

SCHWAIGER

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305, 306, 325, 326

T

137

226

AGRA 059

ADIOLA 033,

108

TATUNG 067

TECHNISAT

059

006, 028, 033, 047, 102

103, 181, 184, 224, 231

TECHNOWELT 164

191, 205, 206, 211

THORENS 225

THORN 067

THORN-FERGUSON 023, 048, 067

TIOKO 135,

TLEWIRE 059

TOKAI 033

TONNA 060, 006, 013,

059, 067, 171, 210

TOPFIELD 011

TORX 341

TOSHIBA 067, 145

TPS 129,

TRENDLINE 222

TRENDPLAIN 222

TRGRA 088

TRIAD 085, 101, 127, 193, 194

TRIASAT 006,

TRIAX

220

060, 006, 033,

047, 211, 220, 230

TRISTAR 025

TUDI 327

TWINNER 115,

058, 071, 080, 148, 208

UNISAT

UNITED CABLE

UNIVERSUM

033, 054, 175

330, 341

UNITOR 051,

003, 009, 071,

164, 165, 176

V AIADIGITAL 078

VARIOSAT 176

VARIOSTAT 176

VECTOR 178

VENTANA 033, 037

VESTEL 165

VIASAT 016

VIDEOCRYPT 023

VIDEOTRON 331

VIDEOWAY 331

VIDIO WAY 015

VIPER 054

VIRGIN MEDIA

VISIOPASS

063

309, 313, 329

VISIOSAT 060, 194, 200

VIVA 161,

VORTEC

VTECH

X

162

017, 082, 083, 132, 142

127, 194, 200, 204

060, 163, 169, 186

WIBO 175

WINERSAT 094

WINTERGARTEN 168

WISI

Y

Z

COM 169

ES 189

AUNKONIG 161

TELEPIU 320,

006, 047, 067, 088,

123, 127, 164, 169,

176, 194, 200, 210

122

172

XRYPTON 226

ZEHNDER

046

060, 046, 166, 169

051, 080, 114, 127, 135

165, 179, 204, 226, 255

314

ZETA-TECHNOLOGY 033

ZODIAC 180

175

TELESAT 164,

TELESERVICE 311,

TELESTAR 006

TELETECH 215

067

TELEWIRE 059

094

TEVION 116

THOMSON 060, 049, 067, 128,

155, 164, 171, 172,

WOORISAT 179

TELECIEL 180,

171, 172, 179, 200,

201, 206, 217, 229

SABRE 067

SAGEM 205,

SAKURA 054,

SALORA 021, 088, 099, 120, 130, 303

034, 050, 189, 227, 001

060, 133, 168,

170, 197, 215

002

SKYLAB 051

SKYMAX 033

SKYSAT 197

SKYVISION 059

SL

SM ELECTRONIC

161, 165, 175, 186

060

SMART 186

SONY 067, 211, 227

SR 222

STARLAND 060

STARRING 094

STARSAT 080

STRONG 017, 025, 179, 180, 186,

196, 211, 226, 235

210

168, 169, 170,

047, 104, 175, 223

017, 094, 165,

178, 190, 197, 226

SELECO 059,

SEPTIMO

SERVI SAT

SIEMENS

213

146, 151, 154

059

090, 176, 199

SILVA 079,

SKANTIN 060

SKARDIN 223

SKINSAT 006

SKR 060

SKY

PHOENIX 054,

PHONOTREND

193

SINTRACK 013

PREDKI 017,

330

341

SAVA

SEEMANN

SEG

PANASAT 235,

PANASONIC 031, 067, 124, 227

021, 048, 067, 164, 176, 210

223

TELEDIREKT 077

TELEFUNKEN 017, 083, 171 , 172

026, 006, 047, 081, 103,

XCOM MULTIMEDIA

158

Reference 55-85

User manual

Notes

159

Reference 55-85

User manual

Notes

160